• Author / Uploaded
• Rick Nitrous

Citation preview

Maintenance Manual of Senova X25 Electrical Equipment BAIC Motor Sales Co., Ltd.

Maintenance Manual X25 2015 Electrical Equipment Version：11.2015

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Contents 3. Removal and installation of instrument cluster ........ 36 4. Reset trip display ...................................................... 37 5. Removal and installation of the quartz clock ........... 38 63 Vehicle Lights.......................................................... 39 1 Overview ................................................................... 39 2 Technical Parameters................................................. 40 3 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code.................................. 40 3.1 DTC fault code list ................................................. 40 3.2 B116512 High Beam Output Short to Power Supply B116514 High Beam Output Short to Ground or Open41 3.3 B116412 Low Beam Output Short to Power Supply B116414 Low Beam Output Short to Ground or Open 45 3.4 B110312 Front Fog Light Output Short to Power Supply B110314 Front Fog Light Output Short to Ground or Open ........................................................... 49 3.5 B110712 Rear Fog Light Output Short to Power Supply B110714 Rear Fog Light Output Short to Ground or Open ........................................................... 53 3.6 B110811 Left Turn Signal Output Short to Ground B110813 Left Turn Signal Output Open ...................... 57 3.7 B110911 Right Turn Signal Output Short to Ground B110913 Right Turn Signal Output Open .................... 61 3.8 B111D11 Hazard Warning Switch Short to Ground ...................................................................................... 64 3.9 B111E11 Rear Fog Light Switch Short to Ground . 65 3.10 B112C1E High Beam/Overtaking Switch Resistance Abnormal.................................................... 66 3.11 B111911 Gearshift Solenoid Valve Output Short to Ground B111913 Gearshift Solenoid Valve Output Open ...................................................................................... 67 3.12 B110212 Daytime Running Light Output Short to Power Supply B110214 Daytime Running Light Output Short to Ground or Open .............................................. 69 4 Interior Lights ........................................................... 72 4.1 Brief Introduction ................................................... 72 4.2 Overview of interior lights ..................................... 72 4.3 Front toplight.......................................................... 73 4.3.1 Removal and installation of front toplight .......... 73 4.3.2 Front fog light bulb replacement ......................... 74 4.4 Trunk lamp ............................................................. 75 4.4.1 Removal and installation of the trunk lamp ........ 75 4.4.2 Replace the trunk lamp bulb................................ 76 5 Exterior Lights .......................................................... 76 5.1 Brief introduction ................................................... 76 5.2 Front combination light assembly .......................... 78 5.2.1 Overview of front combination light assembly ... 78 5.2.2 Removal and installation of front combination light assembly .............................................................. 79 5.2.3 Replace the front combination light bulb ............ 80 5.3 Rear combination light fixed part assembly ........... 85 5.3.1 Overview of rear combination light fixed part

60 Power Distribution .................................................... 1 1 Brief Introduction ....................................................... 1 2 Technical Parameters .................................................. 1 3 Battery ........................................................................ 1 3.1 Battery type.............................................................. 1 3.2 Precautions for handling vehicle battery.................. 2 3.3 Inspection of battery ................................................ 2 3.3.1 Battery inspection method .................................... 2 3.3.2 Visual inspection ................................................... 3 3.3.3 Battery load test .................................................... 3 3.3.4 Vehicle start test .................................................... 5 3.3.5 Test for vehicle charging system........................... 5 3.3.6 Test of battery static voltage ................................. 6 3.4 Charge the battery .................................................... 7 3.5 Battery cable ............................................................ 7 3.5.1 Disconnection and connection of battery negative cable ............................................................................... 7 3.5.2 Disconnection and connection of battery positive cable ............................................................................... 8 3.6 Removal and installation of battery ......................... 9 4. Removal and installation of the battery positive fuse box ............................................................................... 10 5 Removal and installation of the front compartment electrical box................................................................ 11 62 Instrument Cluster ....................................... 13 1 Brief Introduction ..................................................... 13 1.1 General descriptions .............................................. 13 1.2 Display information of instrument cluster ............. 13 1.3 Description of indicator information on instrument cluster .......................................................................... 14 2 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code ................................. 16 2.1 DTC fault code list................................................. 16 2.2 U014000 Loss of Communication with BCM or Length Error of Message Sent by BCM U015100 Loss of Communication with SDM or Length Error of Message Sent by SDM U012700 Loss of Communication with TPMS or Length Error of Message Sent by TPMS U010000 Loss of Communication with EMS or Length Error of Message Sent by EMS.......... 17 2.3 B120100 ABS fault light defective ........................ 23 2.4 B120400 Engine Fault Light Defective B120600 Engine Anti-theft Fault Light Defective ...................... 24 2.5 B120200 Brake fault light defective ...................... 25 2.6 B120500 Transmission fault light defective .......... 27 2.7 B120700 Electric power steering fault light defective ...................................................................... 28 2.8 B182011 Fuel Sensor Short to Ground B182012 Fuel Sensor Short to Power Supply ............................. 30 2.9 B111717 Overvoltage B111716 Undervoltage ...... 32 2.10 B123296 Mileage data error ................................ 35 2.11 B120300 Airbag fault light defective ................... 35

-I-

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

assemblies .................................................................... 85 5.3.2 Removal and installation of the rear combination light fixed part assembly.............................................. 85 5.3.3 Replacement of turn signal bulb ......................... 86 5.3.4 Replacement of brake light bulb ......................... 87 5.4 Rear combination light movable part assembly ..... 89 5.4.1 Overview of rear combination light movable part ..................................................................................... 89 5.4.2 Removal and installation of the rear combination light movable part assembly ........................................ 89 5.4.3 Replacement of reversing light bulb ................... 90 5.5 Left rear fog light assembly ................................... 92 5.5.1 Overview of rear fog light assembly................... 92 5.5.2 Removal and installation of rear fog light assembly ...................................................................... 93 5.5.3 Rear fog light bulb replacement.......................... 93 5.6 Front fog light assembly ........................................ 95 5.6.1 Overview of front fog lights ............................... 95 5.6.2 Removal and installation of front fog light assembly ...................................................................... 95 5.6.3 Front fog light bulb replacement ........................ 96 5.6.4 Adjustment of the front fog light assembly......... 97 5.7 Removal and installation of the high brake light ... 98 5.8 Removal and installation of the side turn signal lamp ..................................................................................... 98 5.9 License plate light .................................................. 99 5.9.1 Removal and installation of license plate light assembly ...................................................................... 99 5.9.2 License plate lamp and bulb replacement ........... 99 5.10 Removal and installation of the light switch...... 100 5.11 Combination switch ........................................... 101 5.11.1 Overview of combination switch .................... 101 5.11.2 Removal and installation of combination switch ................................................................................... 102 5.12 Removal and installation of hazard warning light switch ......................................................................... 103 5.13 Removal and installation of brake switch .......... 103 5.14 Removal and installation of clutch switch ......... 104 5.15 Removal and installation of the reversing light switch ......................................................................... 105 6 Headlight Adjustment ............................................. 105 6.1 Electric height adjustment of front combination light ................................................................................... 105 64 Wiper and Washing System .................................. 106 1 Brief introduction ................................................... 106 2 Technical parameters .............................................. 106 3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting .................... 106 4 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code ............................... 108 4.1 DTC fault code list............................................... 108 4.2 B110412 Front Wiper Enable Output Short to Power Supply B110414 Front Wiper Enable Output Short to Ground or Open ......................................................... 108 4.3 B110512 Front Wiper Speed Output Short to Power Supply B110514 Front Wiper Speed Output Short to

Ground or Open ......................................................... 111 4.4 B110612 Rear Defrost Output Short to Power Supply B110614 Defrost Output Short to Ground or Open B114011 Rear Defrost Switch Stuck ................ 115 4.5 B110E1E Wiper Pause Switch Short to Ground B112A11 Front Washer Switch Stuck B112B11 Rear Washer Switch Stuck.................................................. 119 4.6 B11EC04 RLS_RS Fault B11ED04 RLS_LS Fault B11EE04 RLS Installation Fault U12E487 RLS Response Fault ........................................................... 120 4.7 B112512 Rear Washer Output Short to Power Supply B112514 Rear Washer Output Short to Ground or Open....................................................................... 124 4.8 B112612 Rear Wiper Output Short to Power Supply B112614 Rear Wiper Output Short to Ground or Open .................................................................................... 126 5 Front Wiper ............................................................. 131 5.1 Overview of front wiper ....................................... 131 5.2 Removal and installation of the front wiper blade132 5.2.1 Removal and installation of the boneless front wiper blade ................................................................. 132 5.2.2 Removal and installation of the boned front wiper blade ........................................................................... 132 5.3 Removal and installation of front wiper arm assembly ..................................................................... 134 5.4 Removal and installation of front wiper motor and linkage assembly ........................................................ 135 5.5 Adjust reset position of the wiper blade ............... 136 6 Rear Wiper .............................................................. 137 6.1 Overview of rear wiper ........................................ 137 6.2 Removal and installation of rear wiper blade....... 138 6.3 Removal and installation of rear wiper arm assembly .................................................................................... 138 6.4 Removal and installation of the rear wiper motor assembly ..................................................................... 139 6.5 Adjust reset position of the wiper blade ............... 140 7 Washers System....................................................... 141 7.1 Overview of front windscreen washing system ... 141 7.2 Overview of rear windscreen washing system ..... 142 7.3 Removal and installation of washer pump ........... 143 7.3.1 Removal and installation of the front windscreen washer pump .............................................................. 143 7.3.2 Removal and installation of the rear windscreen washer pump .............................................................. 144 7.4 Removal and installation of washing tank assembly .................................................................................... 145 7.5 Removal and installation of the front windscreen nozzle assembly ......................................................... 145 7.6 Removal and installation of the rear windscreen nozzle assembly ......................................................... 146 8 Washing Unit: Check .............................................. 146 9 Removal and installation of the rain/light sensor .... 147 66 Heating and Cooling System ................................. 149 1 Rear windscreen defrost system .............................. 149 -II-

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

1.1 Brief introduction ................................................ 149 1.2 How it works ....................................................... 149 1.3 Inspection of rear windscreen defrost heating wire ................................................................................... 149 1.4 Removal and installation of rear windscreen defrost relay ........................................................................... 150 1.5 Removal and installation of rear windscreen defrost switch ......................................................................... 151 2 Rearview mirror heating (if any) ............................ 151 2.1 Brief introduction ................................................ 151 2.2 How it works ....................................................... 151 2.3 Removal and installation of the rearview mirror heating wire ............................................................... 151 67 Parking Distance Control System ......................... 153 1 Reversing Radar System ......................................... 153 1.1 System overview .................................................. 153 1.2 Technical parameters ........................................... 153 1.3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting ................. 153 1.3.1 The entire reversing radar system not working. 153 1.3.2 Reverse gear engaged, buzzer sounding constantly ................................................................................... 154 1.3.3 The radar is not working when the reverse gear is engaged ...................................................................... 154 1.4 Overview of reversing radar ................................ 155 1.5 Removal and installation of the reversing radar control unit................................................................. 156 1.6 Reversing radar probe .......................................... 157 1.6.1 Removal and installation of reversing radar probe ................................................................................... 157 1.6.2 Inspection of reversing radar probe .................. 158 2 Rearview Camera System ....................................... 159 2.1 System overview .................................................. 159 2.2 Fault symptoms and troubleshooting ................... 159 2.2.1 Rearview camera display not working.............. 159 2.2.2 Rearview camera not working .......................... 160 2.3 Removal and installation of rearview camera ...... 160 68 Anti-theft Security System .................................... 162 1 Anti-theft Alarm System ......................................... 162 1.1 Brief introduction ................................................ 162 1.1.1 General descriptions ......................................... 162 1.1.2 Overview of anti-theft system functions ........... 163 1.2 Technical parameters ........................................... 163 1.3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting ................. 163 1.4 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code ............................ 164 1.4.1 DTC Fault Code List ........................................ 164 1.4.2 U007300 PCAN Bus Closed U100700 BCAN Bus Closed U010000 Loss of Communication with EMS U010100 Loss of Communication with TCU U015100 Loss of Communication with SDM U015500 Loss of Communication with MIU (ICM) U016400 Loss of Communication with ACC U024500 Loss of Communication with EHU (HUM) U015100 Loss of Communication with SDM U100587 Network Management Limp B111651 EOL Not Programmed

B113600 EMS Transmission Defective ..................... 165 1.4.3 B110004 system internal fault ........................... 172 1.4.4 B111717 Battery Overvoltage B111716 Battery Undervoltage .............................................................. 173 1.4.5 U023100 Loss of Communication with RLS .... 177 1.4.6 B11841D Driver’s Window Output Overcurrent .................................................................................... 180 1.4.7 B11271D Right Front Window Output Overcurrent .................................................................................... 182 1.4.8 B11281D Right Rear Window Output Overcurrent .................................................................................... 183 1.4.9 B11291D Left Rear Window Output Overcurrent .................................................................................... 185 1.4.10 B113912 Horn Output Short to Power Supply B113914 Horn Output Short to Ground or Open ....... 186 1.4.11 B114111 Rearview mirror folding/unfolding switch stuck ................................................................ 190 1.4.12 B111B71 Trunk release switch stuck ......... 191 1.5 Overview of the anti-theft system ........................ 193 1.6 Removal and installation of body controller ........ 194 2 Ignition Switch Assembly ....................................... 195 2.1 Removal and installation of the steering column lock assembly ..................................................................... 195 2.2 Removal and installation of ignition switch ......... 196 3 Oil Line Automatic Cut-off System ........................ 198 69 Audio Visual System ............................................. 199 1 Brief introduction .................................................... 199 1.1 General descriptions ............................................. 199 1.2 Precautions ........................................................... 199 2 Technical parameters ............................................... 199 3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting..................... 199 3.1 The radio has no sound output in working ........... 199 3.2 The radio is not working ...................................... 200 3.3 Station signals can't be received ........................... 200 4 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code................................ 201 4.1 DTC fault code list ............................................... 201 4.2 U014000 Loss of Communication with BCM U015500 Loss of Communication with MIU U010000 Loss of Communication with EMS U100700 Bus Closed U100700 CAN Bus Closed Fault U100587 Network Management Fault B160009 CAN Signal Line Fault ........................................................................... 202 4.3 U170187 Bluetooth Communication Fault .......... 206 4.4 B111717 Battery Overvoltage B111716 Battery Undervoltage .............................................................. 207 5 Overview of Audio Visual System .......................... 210 6 Removal and installation of the DA machine/AUDIO machine ...................................................................... 210 7 USB/HDMI Interface .............................................. 212 7.1 Overview of USB interface and HDMI interface . 212 7.2 Removal and installation of the HAMI interface . 212 7.3 Removal and installation of the USB interface .... 212 8 Speaker .................................................................... 213 8.1 Removal and installation of the tweeter ............... 213 -III-

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

8.2 Removal and installation of the front door full-range speaker ....................................................................... 213 8.3 Removal and installation of the rear door full-range speaker ....................................................................... 214 9 Radio Antenna ........................................................ 215 9.1 Overview of DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna ................................................................................... 215 9.2 Removal and installation of the antenna amplifier ................................................................................... 217 9.3 Overhaul of DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna ................................................................................... 218 10 Steering Wheel...................................................... 219 10.1 Functions of multi-functional steering wheel buttons ....................................................................... 219 10.2 Removal and installation of the multi-functional steering wheel buttons ............................................... 220 11. Removal and installation of the multi-functional display........................................................................ 220 70 AVN Navigation System ....................................... 222 1 Brief introduction ................................................... 222 2 Technical parameters .............................................. 222 3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting .................... 223 3.1 Navigation voice cannot be heard........................ 223 3.2 GPS mark no display ........................................... 223 4 Overview of AVN Navigation System .................... 224 5 Removal and installation of the AVN navigation ... 225 6 DVD Navigation Antenna....................................... 226 6.1 Removal and installation of GPS antenna assembly ................................................................................... 226 72 Protection System ................................................. 228 1 Brief introduction ................................................... 228 2 Technical parameters .............................................. 229 3 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code ............................... 230 3.1 DTC fault code list............................................... 230 3.2 B100049 ECU Internal Fault B100155 ECU Configuration Error U007300 CAN Bus Fault .......... 233 3.3 B10024A Incorrect Installation or Initialization Fault of Driver Peripheral Sensor B100264 Reliability Fault of Driver Peripheral Acceleration Sensor B100296 Driver Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Damaged B100286 Communication Fault of Driver Peripheral Acceleration Sensor B10081C Driver Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Bonding B100811 Driver Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Short to Ground B100812 Driver Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Short to Power Supply............................................................. 234 3.4 B10034A Incorrect Installation or Initialization Fault of Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor B100364 Reliability Fault of Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor B100386 Communication Fault of Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor B100396 Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Damaged B10091C Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Bonding B100911 Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor

Short to Ground B100912 Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Short to Power Supply .............. 237 3.5 B10101C Driver Airbag Bonding B101011 Driver Airbag Short to Ground B101012 Driver Airbag Short to Power Supply B10101B Driver Airbag Resistance too High B10101A Driver Airbag Resistance too Low .... 240 3.6 B10111C Passenger Airbag Bonding B101111 Passenger Airbag Short to Ground B101112 Passenger Airbag Short to Power Supply B10111B Passenger Airbag Resistance too High B10111A Passenger Airbag Resistance too Low .................................................... 243 3.7 B10121C Driver Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Bonding B101211 Driver Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Short to Ground B101212 Driver Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Short to Power Supply B10121B Driver Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Resistance too High B10121A Driver Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Resistance too Low .............................. 245 3.8 B10131C Passenger Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Bonding B101311 Passenger Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Short to Ground B101312 Passenger Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Short to Power Supply B10131B Passenger Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Resistance too High B10131A Passenger Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Resistance too Low .............. 248 3.9 B10141C Driver Side Airbag Bonding B101411 Driver Side Airbag Short to Ground B101412 Driver Side Airbag Short to Power Supply B10141B Driver Side Airbag Resistance too High B10141A Driver Side Airbag Resistance too Low ........................................ 250 3.10 B10151C Passenger Side Airbag Bonding B101511 Passenger Side Airbag Short to Ground B101512 Passenger Side Airbag Short to Power Supply B10151B Passenger Side Airbag Resistance too High B10151A Passenger Side Airbag Resistance too Low ............... 253 3.11 B10161C Passenger Air Curtain Bonding B101611 Passenger Air Curtain Short to Ground B101612 Passenger Air Curtain Short to Power Supply B10161B Passenger Air Curtain Resistance too High B10161A Passenger Air Curtain Resistance too Low ................ 255 3.12 B10171C Driver Air Curtain Bonding B101711 Driver Air Curtain Short to Ground B101712 Driver Air Curtain Short to Power Supply B10171B Driver Air Curtain Resistance too High B10171A Driver Air Curtain Resistance too Low ....................................... 258 3.13 B10201C Driver Seat Belt Buckle Bonding B102012 Driver Seat Belt Buckle Short to Power Supply ........................................................................ 260 3.14 B10211C Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Bonding B102112 Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Short to Power Supply ........................................................................ 262 3.15 B103414 Crash Output Short to Ground or Open B103412 Output Short to Power Supply .................... 265 3.16 U300317 power supply voltage is too high, and U300316 power supply voltage is too low. ................ 267 3.17 B105000 Exploded in Frontal Crash B105100 -IV-

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Exploded in Side Crash ............................................. 269 3.18 B105200 Crash Counter Maximizes .................. 270 3.19 U010000 Loss of Communication with EMS U015500 Loss of Communication with Instrument U100400 Vehicle Speed Information Invalid U100500 Airbag Warning Light Error U015100 Airbag Offline ................................................................................... 270 4 Seat Belt.................................................................. 273 4.1 Brief introduction ................................................ 273 4.1.1 Pay attention to safety regulations of the seat belt retractor...................................................................... 273 4.1.2 Disposal of seat belt retractor ........................... 274 4.2 Overview of seat belt ........................................... 275 4.3 Removal and installation of the front seat belt assembly .................................................................... 276 4.4 Removal and installation of front seat belt buckle assembly .................................................................... 277 4.5 Removal and installation of the height adjuster... 279 4.6 Removal and installation of the rear seat belt assembly .................................................................... 280 4.7 Removal and installation of the rear central seat belt assembly .................................................................... 281 4.8 Removal and installation of the rear double buckle assembly .................................................................... 284 4.9 Removal and installation of the rear single buckle assembly .................................................................... 284 4.10 Seat belt: Check ................................................. 285 4.10.1 Inspection of seat belt appearance .................. 285 4.10.2 Function test of seat belt retractor (locking function) .................................................................... 286 4.10.3 Visual inspection of seat belt buckle............... 287 4.10.4 Function test of seat belt buckle ..................... 287 4.10.5 Check of fixture and fixing point .................... 287 5 Side Airbag ............................................................. 288 5.1 System overview .................................................. 288 5.1.1 Observe the security precautions for airbag operation. ................................................................... 288 5.12 Disposal of the airbag controller ........................ 289 5.2 Overview of airbag .............................................. 289 5.3 Removal and installation of airbag controller...... 290 5.4 Driver airbag ........................................................ 291 5.4.1 Brief introduction.............................................. 291 5.4.2 Removal and installation of the driver airbag ... 291 5.5 Clock spring......................................................... 292 5.5.1 Brief introduction.............................................. 292 5.5.2 Removal and installation of clock spring.......... 293 5.6 Front passenger airbag ......................................... 294 5.6.1 Brief introduction.............................................. 294 5.6.2 Removal and installation of the front passenger airbag ......................................................................... 294 5.7 Side airbag ........................................................... 295 5.7.1 Brief introduction.............................................. 295 5.7.2 Removal and installation of side airbag ............ 295 5.8 Side air curtain ..................................................... 295

5.8.1 Brief introduction .............................................. 295 5.8.2 Removal and installation of the side air curtain 296 5.9 Crash sensor ......................................................... 297 5.9.1 Brief introduction .............................................. 297 5.9.2 Removal and installation of side crash sensor... 298 5.10 Removal and installation of the front passenger seat occupancy sensor ....................................................... 299 73 Air Conditioning System ....................................... 300 1 Brief introduction .................................................... 300 1.1 Repair instructions for vehicle air conditioning system ........................................................................ 300 1.2 Instructions for R-134a Refrigerant ..................... 300 1.3 Instructions for refrigerant oil .............................. 300 2 Check and Diagnosis ............................................... 302 2.1 Air conditioning system pressure too high ........... 302 2.2 Air conditioning system pressure too low ............ 303 2.3 Air conditioning cannot refrigerate ...................... 303 2.4 Compressor abnormal sound ................................ 304 2.5 Cooling air not continuous ................................... 304 3 Technical parameters ............................................... 305 4 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code................................ 306 4.1 DTC fault code list ............................................... 306 4.2 B130114 Evaporator Temperature out of Range .. 306 4.3 B133314 Mode Motor Open or Short Fault ......... 309 4.4 B132914 Temperature Motor Open or Short Fault .................................................................................... 312 4.5 B133614 Internal and External Circulation Motors Open or Short Fault .................................................... 316 4.6 U010000 EMS Communication Loss U014000 BCM Communication Loss U100700 Bus Closed..... 318 4.7 U300317 Battery Overvoltage U300317 Battery Undervoltage B134011 Reference Voltage Short ....... 320 5 Electric Digital Display Air Conditioning ............... 323 5.1 Overview of Functions of the Electric Digital Display Air Conditioning Adjuster............................. 323 5.2 Electric digital display air conditioning–Passenger zone ............................................................................ 324 6 Heater Evaporator Assembly................................... 325 6.1 Removal and installation of the heater evaporator assembly ..................................................................... 325 6.2 Disassembly of the heater evaporator assembly... 329 6.3 Breakdown overview of heater evaporator .......... 334 6.4 Breakdown overview of air intake chamber......... 335 7 Removal and installation of air intake chamber assembly ..................................................................... 336 8 Control System ........................................................ 337 8.1 Removal and installation of the air conditioning controller .................................................................... 337 8.2 Removal and installation of mode motor ............. 338 8.3 Removal and installation of cooling/heating motor .................................................................................... 338 8.4 Removal and installation of circulation motor ..... 339 8.5 Removal and installation of pressure switch ........ 341 8.6 Removal and installation of blower motor ........... 341 -V-

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

8.7 Removal and installation of speed control module ................................................................................... 342 8.8 Evaporator temperature sensor ............................ 342 9. Distribution System ............................................... 343 9.1 Removal and installation of front defroster air duct ................................................................................... 343 9.2 Removal and installation of the center air vent duct ................................................................................... 344 9.3 Removal and installation of rear air duct ............. 345 9.4 Removal and installation of air conditioning air filter element ...................................................................... 346 9.5 Removal and installation of side air vent............. 348 9.6 Removal and installation of center vent .............. 348 9.7 Removal and installation of the defrost cover plate ................................................................................... 349 9.8 Ventilation grille .................................................. 351 9.8.1 Inspection of ventilation grille .......................... 351 9.8.2 Removal and installation of ventilation grille ... 351 10 Pipeline System .................................................... 352 10.1 Brief introduction............................................... 352 10.2 Overview of piping system ................................ 353 10.3 Air conditioning compressor.............................. 354 10.3.1 Overview ........................................................ 354 10.3.2 Installation Suggestions for Air Conditioning Compressor ................................................................ 354 10.3.3 Removal and installation of compressor assembly ................................................................................... 355 10.3.4 Compressor clutch .......................................... 358 10.3.5 Removal and installation of compressor clutch ................................................................................... 359 10.3.6 Inspection of compressor clutch disc .............. 363 10.3.7 Compressor clutch plate run-in ....................... 363 10.4 Removal and installation of condenser .............. 363 10.5 Removal and installation of heater core ............ 366 10.6 Removal and installation of evaporation core ... 370 10.7 Removal and installation of low-pressure pipe .. 374 10.8 Removal and installation of low-pressure hose . 375 10.9 Removal and installation of high-pressure hose 377 10.10 Removal and installation of high-pressure pipe378 10.11 Removal and installation of expansion valve .. 382 10.12 Air conditioning receiver-drier ........................ 383 10.13 Service interface valve core ............................. 386 10.13.1 Brief introduction.......................................... 386 10.13.2 Removal and installation of service interface valve core................................................................... 386 11 Inspection of Condensate Water Discharge Hose . 387 12 Refrigerant ............................................................ 388 12.1 Refrigerant recovery .......................................... 388 12.2 Refrigeration system vacuum ............................ 388 12.3 Refrigerant filling .............................................. 389 13 Filling Quantity..................................................... 390 13.1 Air conditioning refrigerant ............................... 390 13.2 Air conditioning refrigerant oil .......................... 390 74 Network Communication System ......................... 391

1 Brief introduction .................................................... 391 2 Technical parameters ............................................... 391 3 Overview of network communication system ......... 392 4 CAN bus system...................................................... 392 5 LIN bus system ....................................................... 393 6 K-Line ..................................................................... 394 75 Attachment Device ................................................ 395 1 Reminder ................................................................. 395 1.1 Brief introduction ................................................. 395 1.2 Driver side seat belt switch .................................. 395 1.3 Front passenger side seat belt switch ................... 395 1.4 Ignition switch...................................................... 396 2 Cigarette lighter....................................................... 396 2.1 Brief introduction ................................................. 396 2.2 Cigarette lighter seat ............................................ 396 3. USB cable .............................................................. 397 4. Multimedia interface cable ..................................... 397 5. Horn System ........................................................... 398 5.1 Brief introduction ................................................. 398 5.2 Check and Diagnosis ............................................ 398 5.2.1 Speaker not sounding ........................................ 398 5.3 Removal and installation of speaker .................... 399 5.4 Horn switch .......................................................... 399

-VI-

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

60 Power Distribution 1 Brief Introduction Distribution system is the center for power supply and power distribution of electrical equipment on-board, which comprises the following components: 

Battery: to convert electric energy produced by the on-board generator to chemical energy for storage and later to convert the chemical energy to electric energy for use.



Battery cable: battery positive cable connects battery positive terminal with generator and starter; Battery negative cable connects battery negative terminal with vehicle body.



Front compartment electrical box: a kind of safety device located next to the battery in the engine compartment, and to distribute electric energy to various equipment and to provide overload protection.



Instrument panel electrical box: a kind of safety device on the left side of the instrument panel lower steering column, and to distribute electric energy to various equipment and to provide overload protection.

2 Technical Parameters Name

Torque

Specification

Grade

M8×1.5×16

8.8

14～16

Fixing nut of battery negative terminal

M6×1.0

—

6～10

Fixing nut of battery positive terminal

M8×1.25

—

6～10

Fixing bolt of battery pressure plate

M8×1.25

—

14～16

Fixing bolt of front compartment relay box

M6×1.0×25

8.8

6～10

Instrument panel electric box fixing bolt

M6×1.0×25

8.8

6～10

Fixing bolt of battery tray

Tools

Nm

10mm Hexagon Sleeve 10mm Hexagon Sleeve 13mm Hexagon Sleeve 13mm Hexagon Sleeve 8mm Hexagon Sleeve 8mm Hexagon Sleeve

3 Battery Danger Risk of injury! Please note the warnings and safety regulations. Note To avoid damage to the battery or the vehicle, please pay attention to the instructions on the battery label.

3.1 Battery type This vehicle is equipped with a 12V battery in the engine compartment. It is a type of maintenance-free battery with liquid electrolytes (wet charged battery).

Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution 1

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Note 

Do not remove the label or add distilled water. Please note the chapters on battery testing.



Replace the battery if it is damaged.

3.2 Precautions for handling vehicle battery Recognition and avoidance of dangers It is dangerous in the process of handling battery. These dangers can be avoided if the precautions for handling vehicle battery and the warnings on the battery are observed. Note 

Untrained personnel (e.g. apprentices, trainees etc.) may only work on batteries when supervised by a vehicle mechanic/chief mechanic or a vehicle electrician/chief electrician.



Acid liquid is highly corrosive. Electrolytes may cause harmful injury if the battery has not been handled correctly. Therefore, a suitable reactant that can be used for diluting acid erosion must be available. For example, soap solution is a kind of suitable reactant.



Electrolytes leaking from the battery may cause skin burns, acid corrosion and rust on the vehicle. In addition, it may also damage the relevant safety components in the vehicle.



In the static state during charging and after charging, the gas generated is explosive. In extreme cases, gas escaped due to mishandling of the battery may cause explosion.



When repairing the battery, avoid sparks or open flames due to grinding, welding or cutting operations; touch the vehicle body to discharge the static electricity before removing the battery.



Only work on batteries in well ventilated and suitable space.



Scrap disposal: Old batteries are a special type of waste. It can only be disposed of in suitable collecting place according to the conditions specified by laws and regulations.



Do not place the tools on the battery, so as to avoid short circuit.



Exposure to open flames, sparks or flakes is prohibited.Do not smoke when operating on the battery.



The battery must be kept far away from the children.



Do not tilt the battery, or else the acid will flow out from the air outlet.



Always wear gloves and goggles when working on the battery.

3.3 Inspection of battery Danger 

Risk of injury! Please note the Warnings and Safety Procedures.



To avoid damage to the battery or the vehicle, please pay attention to the instructions on the battery label.

3.3.1 Battery inspection method Inspect the battery with the following methods: 1. Visual inspection: external condition, connection and position of the battery. 2. Battery load test: to use a battery tester with printer.

2

Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Vehicle start test: voltage test at the start of the engine. 4. Charging system test: conducted with the engine running to test the battery voltage to see whether the charging system is normal. 5. Battery static voltage test: to decide whether it is necessary to replace the battery.

3.3.2 Visual inspection Danger Risk of personal injury! Please note the Warnings and Safety Procedures. Items for visual inspection before comprehensive testing: external condition, connection and position of the battery. Note 

Failure to secure the battery properly or long-time vibration may damage the internal grid and the housing of battery, shorten the lifespan and result in risk of explosion.



Check whether the battery is secured, and tighten the fixing bolt with the specified tightening torque if necessary.

Visual inspection: 

Whether the battery housing is damaged.If damaged, replace the battery accordingly.



Damaged battery housing may cause acid to leak, which may cause serious damage to the vehicle.Parts that have come into contact with the electrolyte should be treated with electrolyte diluent or soap solution promptly.



Whether the battery electrode (wire connector) is damaged. If any battery terminal is damaged, decide to replace the battery or not according to the damage extent.



If the battery electrode is damaged, good contact with the battery terminals cannot be guaranteed. Please refer to the corresponding vehicle maintenance manual when connecting the battery terminals.



Failure to connect or tighten the battery terminal properly may cause fire on the wire or malfunction of the electrical equipment, so the safe operation of vehicle cannot be guaranteed.

3.3.3 Battery load test To accurately know about the state of the battery and to decide whether it is necessary to replace the battery, conduct battery load test. Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required:

Digital battery tester

Preconditions:

Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution 3

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

1. Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.

2. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 3. Disconnect the positive terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 8 . Danger 

Risk of personal injury! Please note the Warnings and Safety Procedures.



The battery must be tested individually and never test the battery in series. Tips



When the ambient temperature is close to 21 ℃, the test is the most accurate.



If the test temperature is between 4 ℃ to 21 ℃, a reduction of 6 ℃ will raise the voltage by 0.1V; if the test temperature is between 21 ℃ and 37 ℃, an increase of 6 ℃, will lower the voltage by 0.1V.

Test procedure 1. Connect the red terminal of the digital battery tester to the positive terminal of the battery. 2. Connect the black terminal of the digital battery tester to the negative terminal of the battery. 3. Press the digital battery tester load switch, hold for 10 seconds, and read the data. Tips Load switch cannot be kept on for 15 seconds; otherwise, it may damage the digital battery tester. 4. Read the data, and turn off the load switch. 5. Remove the digital battery tester terminal which connects the battery . Note During the load test, the digital battery tester should not overheat, and the interval between tests should be at least 2 minutes. Otherwise, the indicator of digital battery tester darkens. Result analysis for battery load test Tips  As in load test the battery load is heavy, battery voltage drops. 

Conduct the test only once, as repeated tests may cause incorrect results.



After the test, the battery will remain in a low voltage value for a long time. Test result of battery tester

4

Measures to be taken

GOOD

Battery is OK

WEAK

Charge the battery and re-test

Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Test result of battery tester BAD

Measures to be taken Replace battery

3.3.4 Vehicle start test Tips As for the vehicle start test, test the voltage when the engine is started. Preconditions: Note Do not disconnect the battery cables during the test, but the whole vehicle circuit should be well connected. 1. Connect the red terminal of the digital battery tester to the positive terminal of the battery. 2. Connect the black terminal of the digital battery tester to the negative terminal of the battery. Test procedure Start the engine and keep running for 15 minutes. Observe the voltage readouts on the digital battery tester.

Note When the test is started, do not press the load switch of the digital battery tester. Test results The voltage readout of the digital battery tester should be at least 9V. Tips If the display voltage is lower than 9V, charge the battery and re-test. If voltage tested for the second time is still lower than 9V, then the battery is damaged; replace the battery.

3.3.5 Test for vehicle charging system Tips Test for the charging system is conducted with the engine running to test the battery voltage to see whether the charging system is normal. Preconditions: Note Do not disconnect the battery cables during the test, but the whole vehicle circuit should be well connected.

Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution 5

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

1. Start the engine for 10-15min. 2. Shut down the engine 3. With the ignition ON, turn on all the electrical equipment and discharge the battery for just 1 minute. 4. Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment. 5. Connect the red terminal of the digital battery tester to the positive terminal of the battery. 6. Connect the black terminal of the digital battery tester to the negative terminal of the battery. Test procedure Start the engine, keep running at an idle speed of 1200-1500rpm and observe voltage displayed on digital battery tester. Note When the test is started, do not press the load switch of the digital battery tester. Test results The voltage readout of the digital battery tester should be between 13.5V-15.5V. Tips 

If the voltage readout is lower than 13.5V, it means that the battery or the charging system is damaged, and you need to re-test the charging system after the battery load test is completed.



If the voltage readout is higher than 15.5V, it means the charging system is damaged. Repair or replace the generator.

3.3.6 Test of battery static voltage Danger Risk of personal injury! Please note the Warnings and Safety Procedures. Tips The battery static voltage test can be used to determine whether the battery of the stopped or stored vehicles needs re-charging. Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required: 

Handheld multimeter Testing conditions:

Inspection Condition: The battery is neither charged nor discharged for at least two days (i.e. the vehicle has not been started for the past two days). Measure the static voltage of the battery with a handheld multimeter, and the measurement results are as follows: Test result of battery tester Static voltage ≥ 12.5 11 ≤ static voltage ≤ 12.5

6

Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution

Measures to be taken Battery voltage normal Charge the battery

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Measurement values (V) Static voltage ≤ 11

Measures to be taken Charge and then check the battery.

3.4 Charge the battery Danger Risk of injury! Please note the Warnings and Safety Procedures.

Note 

For operation of the battery charger, please refer to its instructions.



Please pay attention to notices indicated on battery label to avoid damage of the battery.



When the battery is damaged, decide to replace the battery or not according to its damage extent.



When charging the battery, pay attention to select correct charging mode on the charger, or otherwise incorrect charging mode would affect performances of the battery.

3.5 Battery cable 3.5.1 Disconnection and connection of battery negative cable Disconnect Danger Risk of injury! Please note the warnings and safety regulations. Note To avoid damage to the battery or the vehicle, please pay attention to the instructions on the battery label. 1. Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment. 2. Loosen the fixing nut -Arrow- on the battery negative cable and remove the negative cable component -1-. Nut - Arrow- specification：M6×1.0 Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 6 - 10 Nm Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 10mm hexagon sleeve

Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution 7

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Connect Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

3.5.2 Disconnection and connection of battery positive cable Disconnect Danger Risk of injury! Please note the warnings and safety regulations. Note To avoid damage to the battery or the vehicle, please pay attention to the instructions on the battery label. 1. Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.

2. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 3. Press the fixing clip -Arrow- and remove cover of fuse box -1- on the battery.

4. Loosen the fixing nut -Arrow- and disconnect the positive cable terminal -1- of the battery. Nut - Arrow- specification：M8×1.25 Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 6 - 10 Nm Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 13mm hexagon sleeve

8

Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Connect Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

3.6 Removal and installation of battery Removal Danger Risk of injury! Please note the warnings and safety regulations. Note To avoid damage to the battery or the vehicle, please pay attention to the instructions on the battery label. Tips 

When removing the battery, first remove the negative cable, and then remove the positive cable.



When installing the battery, first connect the positive cable, then the negative cable.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Disconnect the positive terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 8 . 3. Unscrew the fixing nut -Arrow- of the battery pressure plate, and remove the battery pressure plate -1-. Nut - Arrow- specification：M8×1.25 Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 14 - 16 Nm Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 13mm hexagon sleeve 4. Take out the battery.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: 1. When installing, install battery positive cable before battery negative cable. 2. Check whether the battery is securely installed.

Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution 9

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Tips Insecure installation or fixation of the battery may lead to following risks 

Insecure installation could lead to collision and trigger safety accident.



Oscillation as the battery is not securely installed will damage the battery and battery box separator and shorten service life of the battery.



Incorrect mounting will damage the battery housing (there may be leakage of acid which can cause serious damage).

4. Removal and installation of the battery positive fuse box Removal

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. Note Disconnect and connect the battery cables according to the regulations in the Maintenance Manual.

2. Disconnect the positive terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 8 . 3. Unscrew fixing nuts-Arrow A- and Arrow B- of main fuse box, remove wiring terminal and take out the main fuse box-1-. Nut -Arrow A- specification：M8×1.25 Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 6 - 10 Nm Nut -Arrow A- tool: 13mm hexagon sleeve Nuts - Arrow B - Specifications：M5×0.8 Nut -Arrow B- tightening torque: 4 - 6 Nm Nut -Arrow B- tool: 8mm hexagon sleeve

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

10

Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5 Removal and installation of the front compartment electrical box Removal

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. Note It is necessary to disconnect and connect the battery cables according to the regulations in the Maintenance Manual. 2. Press the fixing clip-1- of front compartment electrical box upper cover, and remove the front compartment electrical box cover-2-.

3. Unscrew the fixing nut -Arrow- of the front compartment electrical box and remove the wire from the connecting stud. Nut - Arrow- specification：M8×1.25 Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 6 - 10 Nm Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 13mm hexagon sleeve

4. Disengage fixing clip -Arrow- of front compartment electrical box-1and remove it from its fixing support.

Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution 11

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Press locking clip -Arrow-, disengage harness -2- from front compartment electrical box-1- and remove the front compartment electrical box.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

12

Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

62 Instrument Cluster 1 Brief Introduction 1.1 General descriptions The vehicle model applies electronic instrument cluster located in front of the driver and above the steering column. Alarm or operation information is obtained with sensor or other systems and indicated on the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster consists of engine coolant thermometer, engine tachometer, trip computer multifunctional screen, speedometer, fuel gauge, indicator, warning light, etc. Trip computer multifunctional screen may indicate fault information of the vehicle. The instrument cluster communicates with all systems through CAN bus.

1.2 Display information of instrument cluster Instrument cluster

1 - Coolant thermometer

2 - Tachometer

3 - Parking brake (hand brake) warning light

4 - Position indicator

5 - Low beam indicator

6 - High beam indicator

7 - Left turn signal lamp

8 - Low engine oil pressure warning light

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

13

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

9 - ABS Failure Warning light

10 - Engine fault warning light

11 - Charging indicator

12 - Low brake fluid level/brake system fault warning light

13 - Right steering indicator

14 - Electric power steering system warning light

15 - ESP OFF (switched off) indicator

16 - ESP start indicator/fault warning light

17 - Start-stop system fault warning light (reserved)

18 - Working indicator of start stop system (reserved)

19 -

20 - Fuel gauge

Vehicle speed signal

21 - Low fuel level warning light

22 - Engine immobilizer indicator

23 - Front passenger’s seat belt not tied warning light

24 - Body anti-theft indicator

25 - Multi-functional screen

26 - Tire pressure monitoring system/ (TPMS) tire pressure fault warning light

27 - Airbag fault warning light

28 - Cruise control indicator

29 - Engine compartment/trunk/four doors not closed

30 - Transmission fault warning light

warning light 31 - Indicator for rear fog light

32 - Indicator for front fog light

33 - Unfastened warning light of driver seat belt

34 - High coolant temperature waning lamp

1.3 Description of indicator information on instrument cluster Alarm light

14

No.

Alarm indication

State

3

Parking brake (hand brake) warning light

Red

4

Position indicator

Green

5

High beam indicator

Blue

6

Low beam indicator

Green

7

Left turn signal lamp

Green

8

Low engine oil pressure warning light

9

ABS Failure Warning light

Yellow

10

Engine fault warning light

Yellow

11

Charging indicator

Red

12

Low brake fluid level/brake system fault warning light

Red

13

Right steering indicator

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

Red

Green

Control logic The warning light lights up when handbrake is not released. It indicates that the position lamp is turned on. When the position lamp is turned on, this indicator will go on. When the low beam is turned on, this indicator will go on. When the high beam is turned on, this indicator will go on. The indicator flashes when left turn signal or hazard warning light is connected; when the indicator flashes faster than usual, it indicates fault of the left turn signal circuit or damage of its bulb. It indicates low oil pressure when lights up after start It indicates fault of ABS system when lights up. It indicates fault of engine when lights up after start. It indicates fault of charging system when lights up after start. It indicates low brake liquid level when lights up without LCD display. The indicator flashes when right turn signal or hazard warning light is connected; when the indicator flashes faster than usual, it indicates fault of the right turn signal circuit or damage of its bulb.

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

No. 14 15

Alarm indication Electric power steering system warning light (yellow) ESP OFF (switched off) indicator

State Yellow Yellow

Control logic It indicates fault of electric power steering system when lights up. It indicates ESP is switched off when lights up. If ESP indicator flashes in running, it indicates

16

ESP start indicator/fault warning light

Yellow

ESP system is working. If ESP indicator is constantly on, it indicates ESP system is at fault.

17

18

Start-stop system fault warning light (reserved) Working indicator (reserved) of start stop system

When the start-stop system does not meet the Yellow

conditions or the start-stop system is in fault, this warning light will go on. This indicator indicates the state of start-stop

Green

system. When start-stop system is turned on, this indicator will go on. If this warning light does not go out after the self-inspection or this warning light comes on

21

Low fuel level warning light

Yellow

when the vehicle is running, it means that the remaining fuel is insufficient. In such case, please add the fuel in time. If the anti-theft authentication of engine fails,

22

Engine immobilizer indicator

Red

this indicator will always be lit, and then the engine can’t be started up.

23 24

26

Front passenger’s seat belt not tied warning light Body anti-theft indicator Tire pressure alarm/TPMS system fault waning lamp

27

Airbag fault warning light

28

Cruise indicator

29 30

Engine compartment/trunk/four doors not closed warning light Transmission fault warning light

Red Red

Flashing indicates actuation of alarm conditions with audible alarm. Anti-theft warning light flashes when anti-theft status is entered. If the tire pressure system is in fault, this

Yellow

indicator will be always lit after flashing for 60 seconds.

Red Green

It indicates fault of air bag system when lights up. When the cruising system is activated, this indicator will always be lit. It indicates at least one of the two door covers is

Red

not closed, as shown in graphical indication on LCD screen.

Yellow

It indicates fault of transmission when lights up. If front fog light indicator lights up after rear fog

31

Indicator for rear fog light

Yellow

light switch is switched on, it indicates the front fog light is on. If front fog light indicator lights up after front

32

Indicator for front fog light

Green

fog light switch is switched on, it indicates the front fog light is on.

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

15

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

No. 33 34

Alarm indication Unfastened warning light of driver seat belt High cooling water temperature warning light

State Red Red

Control logic Flashing indicates actuation of alarm conditions with audible alarm. It indicates high coolant temperature when lights up.

2 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code 2.1 DTC fault code list Fault Code

16

Definition

U014000

Loss of communication with BCM or length error of message sent by BCM

U015100

Loss of communication with SDM or length error of message sent by SDM

U012700

Loss of communication with TPMS or length error of message sent by TPMS

U010000

Loss of communication with EMS or length error of message sent by EMS

U010100

Loss of communication with TCU or length error of message sent by TCU

U012200

Loss of communication with ESP/ABS or length error of message sent by ESP/ABS

B111716

The voltage is too low

B111717

The voltage is too high

B182011

Fuel sensor short to ground

B182012

Fuel sensor short to power supply

U007300

CAN bus is turned off.

B123100

CAN transceiver fault

B123296

Mileage data error

B120100

ABS fault light defective

B120200

Brake fault light defective

B120300

Airbag fault light defective

B120400

Engine fault light defective

B120500

Transmission fault light defective

B120600

Engine anti-theft fault light defective

B120700

Electric power steering fault light defective

U021400

Loss of communication with PEPS node

U021200

Loss of communication with ESCL node

U100587

NM Limphome

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2.2 U014000 Loss of Communication with BCM or Length Error of Message Sent by BCM U015100 Loss of Communication with SDM or Length Error of Message Sent by SDM U012700 Loss of Communication with TPMS or Length Error of Message Sent by TPMS U010000 Loss of Communication with EMS or Length Error of Message Sent by EMS

DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing 

Loss of communication U014000

U015100

with BCM or length error of message sent

DTC trigger conditions

conditions

—

Possible causes

BCM message (0x4A0) is



Wire fault

lost by 10-time double



Control unit fault

the



Wire fault

message sent by airbag to



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Control unit fault

EMS message is lost for



Wire fault

over 15s



Control unit fault

TCU message is lost for



Wire fault

over 15s



Control unit fault

ESP/ABS message is lost



Wire fault

for over 15s



Control unit fault

BUS OFF node is offline



Wire fault

for two times



Control unit fault

Transceiver error once



Wire fault



Control unit fault

PEPS message is lost for



Wire fault

over 15s



Control unit fault

period

by BCM



Power mode is RUN for 5s

Loss of communication



No

with SDM or length error of message sent

—

response

to

bus

by SDM Loss of communication U012700

with TPMS or length error of message sent

—

—

by TPMS 

Loss of communication U010000

with EMS or length error of message sent

—

by EMS 

Loss of communication U010100

with TCU or length error of message sent

—

by TCU 

Loss of communication U012200

with ESP/ABS or length error of message

—

sent by ESP/ABS U007300

CAN bus is turned off.

—

B123100

CAN transceiver fault

—

U021400

Loss of communication with PEPS node

—

  

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

17

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

DTC U021200

DTC Definition Loss of communication

U100587

with ESCL node NM Limphome

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions — —

 

Possible causes

SCL message is lost for



Wire fault

over 15s



Control unit fault

NM Limphome symbolic



Wire fault

position 1



Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect the connector T32a of the instrument cluster and check the connector T32a for crack and abnormality, and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Check whether electrical box fuses FB41 (5A) and FB24 (7.5A) of the instrument panel are blown. −

Yes - Replace the fuse.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. With the ignition under ON status, check whether the voltage between pin T32a/3 of the instrument cluster connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

18

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the voltage between pin T32a/2 of the instrument cluster connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

5. Check whether the wire between pin T32a/1 of the instrument cluster connector and body grounding is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 6.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

19

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6. Disconnect the body controller connector T40a and check whether wires between pins T40a/36 and T40a/37 of the body controller connector and pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the instrument cluster connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

7. Disconnect the airbag controller connector T32b and check whether wires between pins T32b/2 and T32b/17 of the airbag controller connector and pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the instrument cluster connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

20

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

8. Disconnect the engine control unit connector T112 and check whether wires between pins T112/17 and T112/1 of the engine control unit connector and pins T40a/9 and T40a/8 of

the body controller

connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 9.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

9. Disconnect connector T24a of the automatic transmission control unit and check whether wires between pins T24a/7 and T24a/17 of the automatic transmission control unit connector and pins T40a/9 and T40a/8 of the body controller connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 10.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

21

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

10. Disconnect ABS control unit connector T38b and check whether wires between pins T38b/14 and T38b/26 of the ABS control unit connector and pins T40a/9 and T40a/8 of the body controller connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 11.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

11. Check whether wires between pins T16j/11 and T16j/3 of OBD diagnostic interface connector and pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the instrument cluster connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 12.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

12. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 13.

−

No - Replace the instrument cluster.

13. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

22

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2.3 B120100 ABS fault light defective DTC

B120100

DTC Definition ABS fault light defective

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions  —

Possible causes

Current is abnormal when



Wire fault

LED is ON.



Sensor Fault



Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect the connector T32a of the instrument cluster and check the connector T32a for crack and abnormality, and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether wires between pins T40a/36 and T40a/37 of the body controller connector and pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the instrument cluster connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

23

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Check whether wires between pins T38b/14 and T38b/26 of ABS controller connector and pins T40a/9 and T40a/8 of the body controller connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

4. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the instrument cluster.

2.4 B120400 Engine Fault Light Defective B120600 Engine Anti-theft Fault Light Defective DTC

B120400

B120600

DTC Definition Engine fault light defective Engine anti-theft fault light defective

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 



Wire fault



Sensor Fault



Control unit fault

Current is abnormal when



Wire fault

LED is ON.



Sensor Fault



Control unit fault

LED is ON

—  —

Possible causes

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect the connector T32a of the instrument cluster and check the connector T32a for crack and abnormality, and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

24

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Disconnect the body controller connector T40a and check whether wires between pins T40a/36 and T40a/37 of the body controller connector and pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the instrument cluster connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

3. Disconnect the engine control unit connector T112 and check whether wires between pins T112/17 and T112/1 of the engine control unit connector and pins T40a/9 and T40a/8 of

the body controller

connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

4. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the instrument cluster.

2.5 B120200 Brake fault light defective DTC

B120200

DTC Definition Brake fault light defective

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions  —

Possible causes

Current is abnormal when



Wire fault

LED is ON.



Sensor Fault



Control unit fault

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

25

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect connector T1k of parking brake switch, check the connector T1k for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect instrument cluster connector T32a and check whether the wire between pin T32a/8 of the instrument cluster connector and pin T1k/1 of the parking brake switch connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

3. Check whether the pin T1k/1 of the parking brake switch connector is short to body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 4.

26

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4. Disconnect battery negative cable and check whether the pin T1k/1 of the parking brake switch connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

5. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the instrument cluster.

2.6 B120500 Transmission fault light defective DTC

B120500

DTC Definition Transmission fault light defective

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions  —

Possible causes

Current is abnormal when



Wire fault

LED is ON.



Sensor Fault



Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect automatic transmission control unit connector T24a, check the automatic transmission control unit connector T24a for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. Rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

27

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Disconnect the body controller connector T40a and check whether wires between pins T40a/36 and T40a/37 of the body controller connector and pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the instrument cluster connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

3. Disconnect connector T24a of the automatic transmission control unit and check whether wires between pins T24a/7 and T24a/17 of the automatic transmission control unit connector and pins T40a/9 and T40a/8 of the body controller connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

4. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the instrument cluster.

2.7 B120700 Electric power steering fault light defective DTC

B120700

28

DTC Definition Electric power steering fault light defective

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions —



Current is abnormal when LED is ON.

Possible causes 

Wire fault



Sensor Fault



Control unit fault

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect the connector T32a of the instrument cluster and check the connector T32a for crack and abnormality, and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller connector T40a and check whether the wires between pins T40a/36 and T40a/37 of the body controller connector and pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the combination switch connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

3. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller connector T40a and check whether the wires between pins T40a/9 and T40a/8 of the body controller connector and pins T20b/15 and T20b/16 of the EPS controller connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

4. Replace the EPS controller and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No-Replace the EPS controller.

5. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

29

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

−

No - Replace the instrument cluster.

2.8 B182011 Fuel Sensor Short to Ground B182012 Fuel Sensor Short to Power Supply DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions

Possible causes 

B182011

B182012

Fuel sensor short to ground

Fuel sensor short to power supply

 —

measured is 1kΩ for 20s.

scope out

is

invalid. 

Wire fault



Sensor Fault



Control unit fault



The

data

calculated

The circuit is short to ground and its resistance

data

calculated

The circuit is short to ground and its resistance

The

scope out

is

invalid. 

Wire fault



Sensor Fault



Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect the connector T32a of the instrument cluster and check the connector T32a for crack and abnormality, and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect fuel pump connector T4a and check whether the wires between pins T4a/1 and T4a/2 of the fuel pump connector and pins T32a/11 and T32a/27 of the instrument cluster connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

30

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Disconnect battery negative cable and check whether pins T4a/1 and T4a/2 of the fuel pump connector are short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No

Proceed to step 4.

4. Check whether pins T4a/1 and T4a/2 of the fuel pump connector are short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

5. Replace the fuel pump and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 6.

−

No-Replace the fuel pump.

6. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the instrument cluster.

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

31

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2.9 B111717 Overvoltage B111716 Undervoltage DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions

Possible causes 

Functions

such

as

odometer/oil gauge/water thermometer/superch Voltage is B111717

The voltage is too high

higher than the

arging indication/gear 

threshold value

Voltage is >16.2V and

indication are hardly

lasts for 1s

realized

reliably

under night mode 

The

battery

has

insufficient voltage 

Wire fault



Control unit fault



Functions

such

as

odometer/oil gauge/water thermometer/superch Voltage is lower B111716

The voltage is too low

than the threshold value



arging indication/gear

Voltage is Refer to Page 7. 2. Pull the steering wheel outwards as far as possible to make it down to its lowest position. 3. Unscrew the fixing screw of the instrument cluster trim panel -Arrowand remove the instrument cluster trim panel. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 4 Nm

4. Unscrew the fixing screw of the instrument cluster-Arrow-, and remove the instrument cluster -1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm Tips Extract the instrument cluster carefully, until the instrument cluster connector can be removed.

5. Turn unlocking device of the connector in the direction of -Arrow-, disconnect the connecting plug of the instrument cluster and remove the instrument cluster -1-.

36

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: After replacement of the instrument cluster, turn ignition to ON (not starting the engine) and configure the instrument cluster in the items by instructions of the diagnostic tester. Connect the diagnostic tester for testing.

4. Reset trip display 1. With the ignition ON, short press ―INFO‖ button at the left of the instrument cluster after POST to switch trip information to the relevant mode. 2. Long press ―RESET‖ button (＞2s) at the right side of the instrument cluster after the relevant mode is entered to reset subtotal mileage A, subtotal mileage B, average fuel consumption, trip time, etc.

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

37

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Removal and installation of the quartz clock Removal

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Remove the middle trim panel of the instrument panel. => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 84; Vehicle body and painting; Instrument panel; Removal and installation of the middle trim panel assembly of the instrument panel 3. Unscrew the fixing screw of the quartz clock -Arrow-and remove the quartz clock-1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check functions of the quartz clock after installation and adjust the quartz clock if necessary. 5. -Left button -Arrow A-: short press-adjust the minute hand counterclockwise for one minute; Long press-adjust the minute hand counterclockwise continuously; -Right button -Arrow B-: short press- adjust the minute hand clockwise for one minute; Long press- adjust the minute hand clockwise continuously.

38

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

63 Vehicle Lights 1 Overview Lights are lighting tools on the vehicle that may be classified into: interior lights and exterior lights by their different installation positions and purposes. The interior light includes The interior lights consist of following parts: 

Front toplight: to provide vehicle interior front with light.



Trunk light: to provide the trunk with light.

The exterior light includes Exterior lights consist of following parts: 

Front combination light: to play the major roles of lighting and signaling.



Turn signal light: to remind other road occupiers turning of the vehicle.



Fog light: to play the roles of lighting and reminding when running in rainy and foggy weather.



Brake light: to remind when the vehicle is speeding down or stopping.



Reversing light: to remind reversing.



License plate light: to light license plate of the vehicle and facilitate identification of vehicle license plate in the dark.



Position light: to display width and length of the vehicle body at night.



Daytime running light: to warn exterior pedestrians and exterior vehicles in daytime. (Applicable to high configuration vehicle model only)

Bulb specification Name

Model

Specification

Low beam lamp(halogen)

H7

12V/55W

High beam (halogen)

H1

12V/55W

W21/5W

12V/5W

W5W

12V/5W

PY21W

12V/21W

Front fog light

H11

12V/55W

Reversing light

W21W

12V/21W

Rear turn signal lamp

PY21W

12V/21W

Brake light

P21W

12V/21W

Rear fog light

P21W

12V/21W

High mounted brake lamp

LED

12V/3.6W

Front position light and Front combination light

daytime running light (high configuration) Front position light (low configuration) Front turn signal lamp

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

39

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Name

Model

Specification

Trunk lamp

C10W

12V/10W

License plate light

W5W

12V/5W

Front dome light

C5W

12V/5W

LED high Rear position light

configuration/P21/5W low

12V/5W

configuration

2 Technical Parameters Tightening torque Name

Torque

Specification

Grade

—

—

2～3

M6×1.0×15

8.8

4～6

—

—

2.5～3.5

—

—

—

2.5～3.5

—

M6×1.0

—

2.5～3.5

Fixing screw of rear fog light assembly

—

—

2.5～3.5

—

Hight mounted brake lamps retaining nuts

—

—

2～3

—

Fixing screw of the combination switch

—

—

3～5

—

Tightening torque of reversing light switch

—

—

35

Fixing screw of front toplight Fixing bolt of front combination light assembly Fixing screw of front fog light assembly Fixing bolt of rear combination light fixed part assembly Fixing nut of rear combination light movable part

3 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code 3.1 DTC fault code list Fault Code

40

Definition

B110212

Daytime running light output short to power supply

B110214

Daytime running light output short to ground or open

B110312

Front fog light output short to power supply

B110314

Front fog light output short to ground or open

B110712

Rear fog light output short to power supply

B110714

Rear fog light output short to ground or open

B110811

Left turn signal output short to ground

B110813

Left turn signal output open

B110911

Right turn signal output short to ground

B110913

Right turn signal output open

B111911

Gearshift solenoid valve output short to ground

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

Nm

Tools — 10mm Hexagon Sleeve

10mm Hexagon Sleeve

22mm Open wrench

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Fault Code

Definition

B111913

Gearshift solenoid valve output open

B111D11

Hazard warning switch short to ground

B111E11

Rear fog light switch short to ground

B112C11

High beam/overtaking switch short to ground

B116412

Low beam output short to power supply

B116414

Low beam output short to ground or open

B116512

High beam output short to power supply

B116514

High beam output short to ground or open

B111913

Gearshift solenoid valve output open

B111D11

Hazard warning switch short to ground

B111E11

Rear fog light switch short to ground

3.2 B116512 High Beam Output Short to Power Supply B116514 High Beam Output Short to Ground or Open DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

B116512

High beam output short to power supply

—

Possible causes

With the ignition ON, high



Wire fault

beam relay is short to



Actuator Fault

power supply for 200ms



Control unit fault

With the ignition ON, high



Wire fault

beam relay is short to



Actuator Fault

ground or open for 200ms



Control unit fault

when the output is valid.  B116514

High beam output short to ground or open

—

when the output is invalid. Diagnostic steps: 1. Check whether the fuses FB15 (10A) and FB16 (10A) in the instrument panel electrical box are blown. −

Yes - Replace the fuse.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Check the high beam relay J107 for crack and abnormality and check the terminal for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No-Replace the high beam relay J107 and clean the terminal.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

41

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Check whether the high beam relay J107 is normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No Replace the high beam relay J107

Conditions

Multimeter connecting pins

Rated value

Constant state

Common status 85-86

Connectivity

30-87

Connectivity

Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply supply voltage

4. Disconnect body controller connector T40a and front compartment electrical box connector T16b and check whether the wire between pin T16b/9 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin T40a/26 of the body controller connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

42

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T16b/9 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether the pin T16b/9 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

43

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7. Disconnect left front combination light connector T10h and right front combination light connector T10c and check whether wires between pins T16b/7 and T16b/8 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin 10h/8 of the left front combination light connector and pin 10c/8 of the right front combination light connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether pins T16b/7 and T16b/8 of the front compartment electrical box connector are short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 9.

44

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

9. Check whether pins T16b/7 and T16b/8 of the front compartment electrical box connector are short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 10.

10. Replace the high beam lamp and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 11.

−

No-Replace the high beam.

11. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

3.3 B116412 Low Beam Output Short to Power Supply B116414 Low Beam Output Short to Ground or Open DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

B116412

Low beam output short to power supply

—

Possible causes

With the ignition ON, low



Wire fault

beam relay is short to



Actuator Fault

power supply for 200ms



Control unit fault

With the ignition ON, low



Wire fault

beam relay is short to



Actuator Fault

ground or open for 200ms



Control unit fault

when the output is valid.  B116414

Low beam output short to ground or open

—

when the output is invalid. Diagnostic steps: 1. Check whether the fuses FB08 (10A) and FB09 (10A) in the instrument panel electrical box are blown. −

Yes - Replace the fuse.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

45

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Check the low beam relay J105 for crack and abnormality and check the terminal for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No-Replace the low beam relay J105 and clean the terminal.

3. Check whether the low beam relay J105 is normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No Replace the low beam relay J105.

Conditions

Multimeter connecting pins

Rated value

Constant state

Common status 85-86

Connectivity

30-87

Connectivity

Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply supply voltage

4. Disconnect body controller connector T40a and front compartment electrical box connector T16b and check whether the wire between pin T16b/3 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin T40a/27 of the body controller connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

46

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T16b/3 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether the pin T16b/3 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

47

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7. Disconnect left front combination light connector 10h and right front combination light connector 10c and check whether wires between pins T16b/2 and T16b/1 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin 10h/6 of the left front combination light connector and pin 10c/6 of the right front combination light connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether pins T16b/2 and T16b/1 of the front compartment electrical box connector are short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 9.

48

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

9. Check whether pins T16b/2 and T16b/1 of the front compartment electrical box connector are short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 10.

10. Replace the low beam lamp and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes Proceed to Step 11.

−

No-Replace the low beam.

11. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes, find out the reasons from other symptoms.

−

No, replace the body controller.

3.4 B110312 Front Fog Light Output Short to Power Supply B110314 Front Fog Light Output Short to Ground or Open DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

Front fog light output

B110312

short to power supply

—

Possible causes

With the ignition ON, front



Wire fault

fog light relay is short to



Actuator Fault

power supply for 200ms



Control unit fault

With the ignition ON, front



Wire fault

fog light relay is short to



Actuator Fault

ground or open for 200ms



Control unit fault

when the output is valid.  B110314

Front fog light output short to ground or open

—

when the output is invalid. Diagnostic steps: 1. Check whether fuse FB32 (15A) of the front compartment electrical box is blown. −

Yes - Replace the fuse.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

49

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Check the front fog light relay J108 for crack and abnormality and check the terminal for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No-Replace the front fog light relay J108 and clean the terminal.

3. Check whether the front fog light relay J108 is normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No-Replace the front fog light relay J108.

Conditions

Multimeter connecting pins

Rated value

Constant state

Common status 85-86

Connectivity

30-87

Connectivity

Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply supply voltage

4. Disconnect body controller connector T40a and front compartment electrical box connector T20d and check whether the wire between pin T20d/3 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin T40a/5 of the body controller connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

50

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T20d/3 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether the pin T20d/3 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

51

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7. Disconnect left front fog light connector T2dd and right front fog light connector T2zz and check whether wires between pin T18b/7 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin T2dd/1 of the left front fog light connector and pin T2zz/1 of the right front fog light connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T18b/7 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 9.

52

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

8. Check whether the pin T18b/7 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 10.

10. Replace the fog light and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 11.

−

No-Replace the fog light.

11. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

3.5 B110712 Rear Fog Light Output Short to Power Supply B110714 Rear Fog Light Output Short to Ground or Open DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

Rear fog light output

B110712

short to power supply

—

Possible causes

With the ignition ON, rear



Wire fault

fog light relay is short to



Actuator Fault

power supply for 200ms



Control unit fault

With the ignition ON, rear



Wire fault

fog light relay is short to



Actuator Fault

ground or open for 200ms



Control unit fault

when the output is valid.  B110714

Rear fog light output short to ground or open

—

when the output is invalid. Diagnostic steps: 1. Check whether fuse FB32 (10A) of the front compartment electrical box is blown. −

Yes - Replace the fuse.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

53

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Check the front fog light relay J113 for crack and abnormality and check the terminal for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No-Replace the front fog light relay J113 and clean the terminal.

3. Check whether the front fog light relay J113 is normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No-Replace the front fog light relay J113.

Conditions

Multimeter connecting pins

Rated value

Constant state

Common status 85-86

Connectivity

30-87

Connectivity

Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply supply voltage

4. Disconnect body controller connector T40a and front compartment electrical box connector T20d and check whether the wire between pin T20d/5 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin T40a/2 of the body controller connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

54

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T20d/5 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether the pin T20d/5 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

55

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7. Disconnect left rear fog light connector T2bf and right rear fog light connector T2bc and check whether wires between pin T18b/9 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin T2bf/1 of the left front fog light connector and pin T2bc/1 of the right front fog light connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T18b/9 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 9.

56

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

9. Check whether the pin T18b/9 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 10.

10. Replace the fog light and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 11.

−

No-Replace the fog light.

11. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

3.6 B110811 Left Turn Signal Output Short to Ground B110813 Left Turn Signal Output Open DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

B110811

Left turn signal output short to ground

—

Possible causes

With the ignition ON, left



Wire fault

turn signal is short to



Actuator Fault

power supply for 400ms



Control unit fault

With the ignition ON, load



Wire fault

of the left turn signal (front



Actuator Fault

turn signal, rear turn signal



Control unit fault

when the output is valid. 

B110813

Left turn signal output open

—

or both front and rear turn signals) is lost for 400ms when the left turn signal switch is ON.

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect left front combination light connector T10h, left rear combination light connector T6g and left rearview mirror connector T8s and check left front combination light connector T10h, left rear combination light connector T6g and left rearview mirror connector T8s for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

57

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

−

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller connector T18c and check whether the wire between pin T18c/14 body controller connector and pin T10h/9 of the left front combination light connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

3. Check whether the wire between pin T18c/14 of the body controller connector and pin T6g/2 of the left rear combination light connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

58

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4. Check whether the wire between pin T18c/14 of the body controller connector and pin T8s/8 of the left rearview mirror connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

5. Check whether the wire between pin T18c/14 of the body controller connector and the body grounding is conductive. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

59

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6. Check whether the pin T18c/14 of the body controller connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

7. Check whether wires between pin T10h/7 of left front combination light connector, pin T6g/3 of left rear combination light connector, pin T8s/7 of left rearview mirror connector and the body grounding are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Replace the left turn signal lamp and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 9.

−

No-Replace the left turn signal.

9. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

60

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3.7 B110911 Right Turn Signal Output Short to Ground B110913 Right Turn Signal Output Open DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

B110911

Right turn signal output short to ground

With the ignition ON, right



Wire fault



Actuator Fault



Control unit fault

(front turn signal, rear turn



Wire fault

signal or both front and



Actuator Fault

rear turn signals) is lost for



Control unit fault

turn signal is short to

—

power supply for 400ms when the output is valid. 

Possible causes

With the ignition ON, load of the right turn signal

B110913

Right turn signal output open

—

400ms when the left turn signal switch is ON. Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect right front combination light connector T10c, right rear combination light connector T6p and right rearview mirror connector T8h, check right front combination light connector T10c, right rear combination light connector T6p and right rearview mirror connector T8h for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller connector T18c and check whether the wire between pin T18c/11 of the body controller connector and pin T10c/9 of the right front combination light connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

61

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Check whether the wire between pin T18c/11 of the body controller connector and pin T6p/2 of the right rear combination light connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

4. Check whether the wire between pin T18c/11 of the body controller connector and pin T8h/8 of the right rearview mirror connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

62

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T18c/11 of the right front combination light connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether the pin T18c/11 of the body controller connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

63

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7. Check whether wires between pin T10c/7 of right front combination light connector, pin T6p/3 of right rear combination light connector, pin T8h/7 of right rearview mirror connector pin and the body grounding are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Replace the right turn signal lamp and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes

−

No-Replace the right turn signal.

Proceed to Step 9.

9. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes, find out the reasons from other symptoms.

−

No, replace the body controller.

3.8 B111D11 Hazard Warning Switch Short to Ground DTC

B111D11

DTC Definition Hazard warning switch short to ground

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions  —

With hazard

the

ignition warning

switch is valid for 15s.

Possible causes

ON,



Wire fault

light



Actuator Fault



Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect body controller connector T40a and hazard warning light switch connector T6n and check body controller connector T40a and hazard warning light switch connector T6n for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

64

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wire between pin T6n/2 of the hazard warning light switch connector and the body grounding is conductive. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. Replace the hazard warning light switch, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes Proceed to Step 4.

−

No-Replace the hazard warning light switch.

4. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes, find out the reasons from other symptoms.

−

No, replace the body controller.

3.9 B111E11 Rear Fog Light Switch Short to Ground DTC

B111E11

DTC Definition Rear fog light switch short to ground

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions  —

Possible causes

With the ignition ON, rear



Wire fault

fog light switch is valid for



Actuator Fault

15s.



Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect body controller connector T40a and light combination switch connector T12g, check body controller connector T40a and light combination switch connector T12g for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

65

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether wires between pins T12g/8 and T12g/9 of the light combination switch connector and the body grounding are conductive. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. Replace the light combination switch, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes

−

No Replacing light combination switch

Proceed to Step 4.

4. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes, find out the reasons from other symptoms.

−

No, replace the body controller.

3.10 B112C1E High Beam/Overtaking Switch Resistance Abnormal DTC

B112C11

DTC Definition High beam/overtaking switch short to ground

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions  —

Possible causes

ON,



Wire fault

overtaking light switch is



Actuator Fault

valid for 15s.



Control unit fault

With

the

ignition

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect light combination switch connector T12g, check light combination switch connector T12g for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

66

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Check whether the pin T12g/2 of the light combination switch connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. Replace the light combination switch, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No Replacing light combination switch

4. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

3.11 B111911 Gearshift Solenoid Valve Output Short to Ground B111913 Gearshift Solenoid Valve Output Open DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing 

Gearshift solenoid B111911

valve output short to

DTC trigger conditions

conditions

B111913

valve output open

the

ignition

ON,



Wire fault



Actuator Fault



Control unit fault

With the ignition ON, load



Wire fault

of BTSI is lost for 400ms



Actuator Fault

when BTSI output is ON.



Control unit fault

BTSI output is short to

—

ground for 400ms when

ground Gearshift solenoid

With

the output is valid.  —

Possible causes

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect AT gearshift lever connector T10f, check AT gearshift lever connector T10f for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

67

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller connector T40b and check whether the wires between pins T40b/21 and T40b/7 of the body controller connector and pins T10f/2 and T10f/4 of AT gearshift lever connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

3. Check whether the pins T10f/2 and T10f/4 of AT gearshift lever connector are short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 4.

68

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4. Check whether pins T10f/2 and T10f/4 of the AT gearshift lever connector are short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

5. Replace the automatic transmission sensor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 6.

−

No-Replace the automatic transmission sensor.

6. Replace the automatic transmission control unit, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No-Replace the automatic transmission control unit.

7. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

3.12 B110212 Daytime Running Light Output Short to Power Supply B110214 Daytime Running Light Output Short to Ground or Open DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

Daytime running light B110212

output short to power

—

supply

With

the

ignition

Possible causes

ON,

daytime running light relay



Wire fault

is short to power supply



Actuator Fault

for 200ms when the output



Control unit fault

daytime running light relay



Wire fault

is short to ground or open



Actuator Fault

for 200ms when the output



Control unit fault

is valid.  Daytime running light B110214

output short to ground or open

—

With

the

ignition

ON,

is invalid.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

69

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect left front combination light connector T10h and right front combination light T10c, check left front combination light connector T10h and right front combination light T10c for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller connector T18c and check whether the wires between pins T18c/14 and T180c/11 of the body controller connector and pin T10h/9 of the left front combination light connector and pin T10c/9 of the right front combination light are conductive. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. Disconnect battery negative cable and check whether pins T18c/14 and T180c/11 of the body controller connector are short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 4.

70

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4. Check whether pins T18c/14 and T180c/11 of the body controller connector are short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether the wires between pin T10h/9 of the left front combination light connector, pin T10c/9 of the right front combination light and the body grounding are conductive. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

-NO Proceed to Step 6.

6. Replace the daytime running light bulb, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No-Replace the daytime running light bulb.

7. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

71

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4 Interior Lights 4.1 Brief Introduction The interior lights are lighting devices inside the vehicle that consist of following parts: front toplight and trunk lamp. The power supply logic is as following: 

Front toplight: front toplight is powered by body controller and lights up or not according to position of the front toplight switch.



Trunk light: the trunk lamp is directly powered by the battery that lights up when trunk cover is opened and goes out when the trunk cover is closed.

4.2 Overview of interior lights

1 - Luggage compartment light

2 - Front toplight







72

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 75 Replace the trunk lamp bulb=> Refer to page 76

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights



Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 73 Replace the front toplight bulb=> Refer to page 74

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4.3 Front toplight 4.3.1 Removal and installation of front toplight Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

Plastic skid plate

Removal

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Pry out the front toplight cover -1- in the positon of-Arrow- with tools.

3. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow-of the front toplight and remove the front toplight -1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

73

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- and remove the front toplight-1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check functions of the front toplight after installation.

4.3.2 Front fog light bulb replacement Removal

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Pry out the front toplight cover -1- in the positon of-Arrow- with tools.

3. Take out the front toplight bulb -1- from the fixing clip. Model of front toplight bulb: C5W Specification of front toplight bulb: 12V/5W

74

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:



Tips Be sure to wear gloves when replacing the bulb instead of bonding the bulb directly by hands, or otherwise you may shorten service life of the bulb or lead to damage of the bulb.



Check functions of the front toplight after installation.

4.4 Trunk lamp 4.4.1 Removal and installation of the trunk lamp Removal

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Pry out the trunk lamp-1- at the position of -Arrow- with tools.

3. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the trunk lamp and remove the trunk lamp -1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check functions of the trunk lamp after installation.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

75

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4.4.2 Replace the trunk lamp bulb Removal

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Pry out the trunk lamp-1- at the position of -Arrow- with tools.

3. Extract the trunk lamp bulb -1- from the fixing clip. Model of trunk lamp bulb: C10W Specification of trunk lamp bulb: 12V/10w

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:



Tips Be sure to wear gloves when replacing the bulb instead of bonding the bulb directly by hands, or otherwise you may shorten service life of the bulb or lead to damage of the bulb.



Check functions of the trunk lamp after installation.

5 Exterior Lights 5.1 Brief introduction Exterior lights consist of followings: 

76

Front combination light

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment



Turn signal lamp



Fog light



Brake light



Reversing light



License plate light



Position light



Daytime running lamp

The power supply logic is as following: 

Front combination light: with the light switch to low beam position, the body controller detects the low beam ON signal and controls the low beam relay in the front compartment electrical box; the low beam power supply is connected and the low beam starts to work;



Turn signal light: flip the switch of the turn signal light upward or downward, and power is supplied to the left or the right turn signal light.



Hazard warning light: Press the hazard warning light switch, power is supplied to all the turn signal lamps.



Fog light: turn the fog light switch to the fog light position and power is supplied to both front and rear fog lights.



Brake light: Press the brake pedal and power is supplied to the brake light via brake switch.



Reversing light: With the gear selector in reverse position, turn on the reversing switch and power is supplied to the reversing light.



License plate light: Turn on the light switch and power is supplied to the license plate light.



Position light: Turn on the light switch and power is supplied to the position light.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

77

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5.2 Front combination light assembly 5.2.1 Overview of front combination light assembly

1 -Low beam bulb

2 - Sealing cover



Total: 2 (one on each side)



Used for low beam



Replace the low beam bulb=>Refer to Page 80



Total: 2 (one on each side)



Check, replace if necessary

3 - Sealing cover

4 - Dimming motor



Used for position light



Total: 2 (one on each side)



Total: 2 (one on each side)



Check, replace if necessary



Check, replace if necessary

5 - Position light/daytime running light bulb

6 - Turn signal bulb holder





Total: 2 (one on each side)



Check, replace if necessary

Daytime running light (applicable to high configuration vehicle model only)



Total: 2 (one on each side)



Replace the position light bulb=> Refer to page 80

7 - Turn signal bulb

78

Repair Group 63

8 - Front combination light cover

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment



Total: 2 (one on each side)



Total: 2 (one on each side)



Replace the turn signal bulb=>Refer to Page 80



Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 79

9 - High beam bulb

10 - Sealing cover



Total: 2 (one on each side)



Used for high beam



Replace the high beam bulb=>Refer to Page 80



Total: 2 (one on each side)



Check, replace if necessary

5.2.2 Removal and installation of front combination light assembly Removal Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left front combination light assembly, but may serve as a reference for the right side.

1. Remove the front bumper component=>Vehicle Body and Painting; Repair Group:83; Exterior equipment; Removal and installation of front bumper component. 2. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow- of the left front combination light assembly. Bolt - Arrow - Specifications：M6×1.0×15 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 4 - 6 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve 3. Remove left front combination light assembly -1-.

Tips Extract the left front combination light assembly carefully until the connecting plug of the left front combination light can be removed.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

79

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4. Disconnect the connecting plugs -Arrow A- and -Arrow B- of left front combination light assembly and remove the front combination light.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: 1. Check whether the gap between the right front combination light assembly and the vehicle body is even. If the gap between the right front combination light assembly and the vehicle body is uneven, align the installation position. 2. Adjust the left front combination light after installation. => General; Repair Group: 01: General information; Maintenance: Working description: Headlamp: Check and Adjustment

5.2.3 Replace the front combination light bulb Halogen high beam bulb: Replace Removal Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the high beam bulb of the right front combination light assembly, but may serve as a reference for the left side.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Disengage sealing cover -1- of the left high beam.

80

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Press the fixing clip in the direction of -Arrow- and remove the left high beam bulb -1-. Model of high beam bulb (halogen): H1 Specification of high beam bulb

(halogen): 12V/55W

4. Remove the left high beam bulb component from the connector.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:



Tips Be sure to wear gloves when replacing the bulb instead of bonding the bulb directly by hands, or otherwise you may shorten service life of the bulb or lead to damage of the bulb.



Check functions of the front combination light assembly after installation.

Halogen low beam bulb: Replace Removal Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the low beam bulb of the right front combination light assembly, but may serve as a reference for the left side.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Press the fixing clip in the direction of -Arrow- and remove cover plate of service hole on front wheel cover fender. Tips  The position light may be removed inside the engine compartment also.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

81

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Disengage sealing cover-1- of the left low beam.

4. Turn in the direction of -Arrow- and remove the low beam bulb component -1-. Model of low beam bulb (halogen): H7 Specification of low beam bulb

(halogen): 12V/55W

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:



Tips Be sure to wear gloves when replacing the bulb instead of bonding the bulb directly by hands, or otherwise you may shorten service life of the bulb or lead to damage of the bulb.



Check functions of the front combination light assembly after installation.

Position light bulb and daytime running light bulb: Replace Tips Daytime running light bulb is applicable to high configuration vehicle model only. Removal Tips The instruction is only for removal and installation of position light bulb and daytime running light bulb in the left front combination light assembly, but may serve as a reference for removal and installation of position light bulb and daytime running light bulb in the right front combination light assembly.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.

82

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Press the fixing clip in the direction of -Arrow- and remove cover plate of service hole on front wheel cover fender. Tips The position light may be removed inside the engine compartment also.

3. Disengage sealing cover -1- of left position light bulb and daytime running light.

4. Extract position light and daytime running light bulb component and extract position light bulb and daytime running light bulb -1- from the holder -2-. Model of position light bulb W21/5W (high configuration)/W5W(low configuration) Specification of position light bulb: 12V/5W

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:



Tips Be sure to wear gloves when replacing the bulb instead of bonding the bulb directly by hands, or otherwise you may shorten service life of the bulb or lead to damage of the bulb.



Check functions of the front combination light assembly after installation.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

83

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Replace the turn signal lamp bulb. Removal Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the front turn signal bulb of the right front combination light assembly, but may serve as a reference for the left side.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Turn in the direction of -Arrow- and remove the front turn signal light holder -1-.

3. Turn the front turn signal light bulb -1- in the direction of -Arrowand take it out of the front turn signal light holder -2-. Model of turn signal light bulb: PY21W Specification of turn signal light bulb: 12V/21W

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Tips 

Be sure to wear gloves when replacing the bulb instead of bonding the bulb directly by hands, or otherwise you may shorten service life of the bulb or lead to damage of the bulb.



84

Check functions of the front combination light assembly after installation.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5.3 Rear combination light fixed part assembly 5.3.1 Overview of rear combination light fixed part assemblies

1-

Rear combination light (fixed part)

2 - Brake light bulb



Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 85



Replace the brake light bulb=> Refer to page 87

3 - Turn signal bulb

4 - Bulb holder and wire



Replace the turn signal bulb=>Refer to Page 86





Total: 2 (one on each side)

Total: 2 (one on each side)

5 - Screw 

Total: 4 (one on each side)

5.3.2 Removal and installation of the rear combination light fixed part assembly Removal

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

85

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left rear combination light fixed part assembly, but may serve as a reference for the right side.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of left rear combination light fixed part assembly and remove the left rear combination light fixed part assembly -1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2.5 - 3.5 Nm 3. Pull out harness rubber sealing cover of the left rear combination light fixed part.

4. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the left rear combination light fixed part assembly and remove the left rear combination light fixed part assembly -1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check functions of the rear combination light fixed part assembly after installation.

5.3.3 Replacement of turn signal bulb Removal Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left turn signal bulb, but may serve as a reference for the right side.

1. Remove the left rear combination light fixed part assembly=>Refer to Page 85 .

86

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Remove the left turn signal holder -1- by turning in the direction of -Arrow-.

3. Unscrew left turn signal bulb -1- from the left turn signal indicator holder -2- by turning in the direction of -Arrow-. Model of turn signal bulb: PY21W Specification of turn signal bulb: 12V/21W

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Tips 

Do not touch the bulb glass when installing the bulb. Your fingers will leave a mark on the bulb that makes the bulb glass turbid.



Check functions of the turn signal after installation.

5.3.4 Replacement of brake light bulb Removal Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left brake light bulb, but may serve as a reference for the right side.

1. Remove the left rear combination light fixed part assembly=>Refer to Page 85 .

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

87

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Remove the left brake light holder -1- by turning in the direction of -Arrow-.

3. Unscrew the left brake light bulb -1- out of the left brake light holder -2-. Model of brake light bulb: P21W Specification of brake light bulb: 12V/21W

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:



Tips Do not touch the bulb glass when installing the bulb. Your fingers will leave a mark on the bulb that makes the bulb glass turbid.



88

Check functions of the turn signal after installation.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5.4 Rear combination light movable part assembly 5.4.1 Overview of rear combination light movable part

1 - Rear combination light movable part

2 - Reversing light bulb

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 89

Total: 2 (one on each side)

Replace the reversing light bulb=> Refer to page 90

5.4.2 Removal and installation of the rear combination light movable part assembly Removal Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left rear combination light movable part assembly, but may serve as a reference for the right side.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

89

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Pry out cover plate -1- of the left rear combination light movable part assembly with tools.

3. Disengage the connector of the left rear combination light movable part assembly -Arrow- A. 4. Unscrew the fixing nut of the left rear combination light movable part assembly -Arrow-B. Remove the left rear combination light movable part assembly. Nuts - Arrow B - Specifications：M6×1.0 Nut -Arrow B- tightening torque: 2.5 - 3.5 Nm Nut -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

5.4.3 Replacement of reversing light bulb Removal Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left reversing light bulb, but may serve as a reference for the right side.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.

90

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Pry out cover plate -1- of the left rear combination light movable part assembly with tools.

3. Remove the left reversing light holder -1- by turning in the direction of -Arrow-.

4. Extract the left reversing light bulb -1- from the left reversing light holder -2- in the direction of -Arrow-. Model of reversing light bulb: W21W Specification of reversing light bulb: 12V/21W

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Tips 

Do not touch the bulb glass when installing the bulb. Your fingers will leave a mark on the bulb that makes the bulb glass turbid.



Check functions of rear fog light after installation.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

91

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5.5 Left rear fog light assembly 5.5.1 Overview of rear fog light assembly

1 - Left rear fog light power supply

2 - Type-U exhaust pipe

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 93 3 - Rear fog light bulb Model: P21W specification: 12V/21W

Replace the rear fog light bulb=> Refer to page 93

92

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

4 - Rear fog light bulb holder

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5.5.2 Removal and installation of rear fog light assembly Removal

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Remove lower fender of rear wheel cover => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment, rear wheel cover fender, removal and installation of the rear wheel cover fender component. 3. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the rear fog light assembly.

4. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of the rear fog light assembly and remove the rear fog light assembly -1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2.5 - 3.5 Nm

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

5.5.3 Rear fog light bulb replacement Removal

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Remove lower fender of rear wheel cover => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment, rear wheel cover fender, removal and installation of the rear wheel cover fender component.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

93

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Turn in the direction of -Arrow- and remove the rear fog light holder -1-.

4. Turn the rear fog light bulb -1- in the direction of -Arrow- and take it out of the rear fog light holder -2-. Model of rear fog light bulb: P21W Specification of rear fog light bulb: 12V/21W

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Tips 

Do not touch the bulb glass when installing the bulb. Your fingers will leave a mark on the bulb that makes the bulb glass turbid.



94

Check functions of rear fog light after installation.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5.6 Front fog light assembly 5.6.1 Overview of front fog lights

1 - Front fog light

2 - Front fog light bulb





Model：H11



Specification：12V/55W



Replacement => Refer to page 96

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 95

3 - Screw 

Total: 6 (one on each side)



Tightening torque：2.5～3.5 Nm

5.6.2 Removal and installation of front fog light assembly Removal

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Remove the front bumper component (applicable to right front fog light only) => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment; Removal and installation of the front bumper component.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

95

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Disengage the connecting plug -Arrow- of the front fog light.

4. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of the front fog light and remove the front fog light -1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2.5 - 3.5 Nm

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

5.6.3 Front fog light bulb replacement Removal Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left side front fog light bulb, but may serve as a reference for the right side.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Remove the front bumper component (applicable to right front fog light only) => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment; Removal and installation of the front bumper component.

96

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Disengage the connecting plug -Arrow- of the fog light from the fog light.

4. Turn the left front fog light bulb -1- in the direction of -Arrow- and remove the front fog light bulb -1- out of the left front fog light. Model of fog light bulb: H11 Specification of fog light bulb: 12V/55W

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

1. Check front fog light assembly adjuster and adjust the front fog light assembly adjuster if necessary => Refer to page 97.

5.6.4 Adjustment of the front fog light assembly Adjustment conditions 1. The tire pressure must be standard value. 2. The vehicle shall park on a level ground. 3. The driver is seating inside the vehicle (or carrying 76kg load) and the fuel tank is filled up with fuel. 4. Start the engine. Adjustment

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

97

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Adjust vertical irradiation direction of the front fog light assembly by turning the adjusting bolt -Arrow- in order to adjust irradiation distance of the front fog light.

5.7 Removal and installation of the high brake light Removal

1. Remove spoiler component => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 88; Back door; Removal and installation of the spoiler component. 2. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of the high brake light and remove the high brake light-1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm Specification of high brake light: 12V/3.6W Model of high brake light: LED

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check functions of the high brake light after installation.

5.8 Removal and installation of the side turn signal lamp Tips Remove the side turn signal on the exterior rearview mirror => Vehicle body and painting: Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment; Disassembly and assembly of the exterior rearview mirror.

98

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5.9 License plate light 5.9.1 Removal and installation of license plate light assembly Removal Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left license plate light assembly, but may serve as a reference for the right side.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Pry out the left license plate light assembly -1- at the position of -Arrow- with tools.

3. Disengage the connector of the left license plate light assembly -Arrow- and remove the left license plate light assembly -1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check functions of the left license plate light after installation.

5.9.2 License plate lamp and bulb replacement Removal

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

99

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left license plate light bulb, but may serve as a reference for the right side.

1. Remove the left license plate light assembly => Refer to page 99. 2. Unscrew the left license plate light holder -1- in the direction of -Arrow-.

3. Extract the left brake light bulb -1- from its holder -2- in the direction of -Arrow-. Model of license plate light bulb： W5W Specification of license plate light bulb： 12V/5W

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Tips  Do not touch the bulb glass when installing the bulb. Your fingers will leave a mark on the bulb that makes the bulb glass turbid. 

Check functions of the left license plate light after installation.

5.10 Removal and installation of the light switch Removal

1. Removal of the left lower trim panel of the instrument panel=>Body and painting;Repair group:82;Instrument panel;Removal and installation of the left lower trim panel of the instrument panel

100

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Disengage the fixing clip -Arrow- and remove the light switch assembly -1-.

3. Disengage the fixing clip -Arrow A- and remove the light luminance adjustment switch -1-. 4. Disengage the fixing clip -Arrow B- and remove the light luminance adjustment switch -2-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

5.11 Combination switch 5.11.1 Overview of combination switch 1. Light switch −

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 102

2. Wiper switch −

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 102

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

101

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5.11.2 Removal and installation of combination switch Removal

1. Remove clock spring component => Electrical equipment; Repair Group: 72; Protection system; Removal and installation of the clock spring component. 2. Disconnect the connecting plugs -Arrow A- and -Arrow B- of the combination switch.

3. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of the combination switch and remove the combination switch -1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 3 - 5 Nm

Further disassemble 4. Unscrew the screw-Arrow- and remove light switch -1- and wiper switch -2- from the combination switch bracket -3-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 0.6 - 0.8Nm

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

102

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Check functions of the combination switch after installation.

5.12 Removal and installation of hazard warning light switch 

The hazard warning light switch -1- is under the center vent.

Removal

1. Remove DA machine/AVN navigation => Refer to page 224. 2. Press the fixing clip in the direction of -Arrow- and remove the hazard warning light switch -1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check functions of the hazard warning light switch after installation.

5.13 Removal and installation of brake switch Removal

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

103

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the brake switch, turn counterclockwise and remove the brake switch -1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures. Pay attention to correspondence of installation holes and the brake switch.

5.14 Removal and installation of clutch switch Removal

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Remove instrument panel left lower trim panel assembly=> Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 82; Instrument panel; Removal and installation of the instrument panel left lower trim panel assembly. 3. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the clutch switch, turn counterclockwise and remove the clutch switch -1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures. Pay attention to correspondence of installation holes and the clutch switch. When installing the clutch switch, pull out its ejector rod and the switch would adjust its stroke automatically in the process of pedal return.

104

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5.15 Removal and installation of the reversing light switch Removal

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the reversing light switch. 3. Unscrew the reversing light switch -1-. Tightening torque of the reversing light switch -1-: 35 Nm Reversing light switch -1-Tool: 22mm combination wrench

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

6 Headlight Adjustment 6.1 Electric height adjustment of front combination light Adjust vertical irradiation angle of the front combination light by its height adjustment switch on the light switch in order to adjust its irradiation distance. Height adjustment switch -1- of the front combination light has 4 positions 1. It is only for the driver or the driver and front passengers (without belongings). 2. Position ―1‖: 1 driver and uniform distribution load inside the trunk 3. Position ―2‖: all seats taken 4. Position ―3‖: all seats taken and uniform distribution load inside the trunk

Repair Group 63

- Vehicle lights

105

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

64 Wiper and Washing System 1 Brief introduction Controlled by the body control module (BCM), the wiper and washing system functions after receiving the driver's command. All the wiping and washing functions are controlled by the wiper component assembly installed on the right side of the steering wheel, and the system components include: 

Front and rear wiper blades



Front and rear wiper arm



Front and rear wiper motor and linkage mechanism



Washing tank, front (rear) windscreen washer pump and front (rear) windscreen nozzle assembly

Divided according to vehicle model: vehicle model with rain sensor and vehicle model without rain sensor The wiper and washing system control lever located at the right side of the steering column has five positions from top to bottom, namely: 

Single wiper position



OFF position



Automatic wiper (AUTO) or INT position



Low speed wiper position



High speed wiper position

2 Technical parameters Name Fixing bolt of front wiper motor and linkage mechanism Fixing nut of wiper arm assembly Fixing bolt of the rear wiper motor assembly Fixing nut of wiper arm assembly Fixing bolt of the washing tank assembly

Torque

Specification

Grade

M6×1.0×30

8.8

8～10

M8×1.25

8

18～22

M6×1.0×25

8.8

8～10

M8×1.25

8

8～12

M6×1.0×20

8.8

6～8

Nm

Tools 10mm Hexagon Sleeve 13mm Hexagon Sleeve 10mm Hexagon Sleeve 13mm Hexagon Sleeve 10mm Hexagon Sleeve

3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting Wiper not movable No.

Inspection steps

0

Preliminary Inspection Check whether the battery voltage is normal?

1

Check the fixing nut of the wiper arm

Check results Normal

There's a fault

Proceed to Step 1.

Undervoltage

Normal

There's a fault

Check whether the fixing nut of the wiper arm is

Wiper blade does not Proceed to Step 2.

loose 2

106

Check wiper system fuse

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

move or rotates at a certain speed

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods Charge the battery or replace the battery Operation methods Tighten nut with the specified torque Operation methods

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

No.

3

4

5

Inspection steps Check whether the wiper system fuse is blown Check wiper system relay Check whether the wiper system relay is working Check the wiper motor rocker arm Check whether the rocker arm nut on the wiper motor is loose Check the motor Check whether the wiper motor is damaged

Check the wiper component Check whether the wiper component is damaged 7 Check the operation After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether the fault is still there. Washing system not working 6

No. 0

1

2

3

4

5

Inspection steps Preliminary Inspection Check whether the battery voltage is normal? Check the fuse Check whether the washing system fuse is blown Check the washing system relay Check whether the washing system relay is working Check the wiper component Check whether the wiper component is damaged Check the washer pump Check whether the washer pump is damaged Check the operation After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether the fault is still there.

Check results Proceed to Step 3.

Fuse blown

Replace the fuse

Normal

There's a fault Wiper system relay not working

Operation methods

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 5.

Rocker arm nut on the wiper motor loose

Tighten nut with the specified torque

There's a fault Wiper blade does not move or rotates at a certain speed

Operation methods

There's a fault

Operation methods

Normal

Wiper component damaged There's a fault

Replace the wiper component Operation methods

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

Find the cause from other symptoms

Normal

Check results There's a fault

Proceed to Step 1.

Undervoltage

Normal

There's a fault

Proceed to Step 2.

Washing system fuse blown

Replace the fuse

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 3.

Washing system relay not working

Replace the relay.

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Normal

Wiper component damaged There's a fault

Proceed to Step 5.

Washer pump damaged

Normal

There's a fault

Replace the wiper component Operation methods Replace the washer pump Operation methods

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

Proceed to Step 4.

Normal Proceed to Step 6.

Normal Proceed to Step 7.

Proceed to Step 4.

Replace the relay.

Replace the wiper motor

Operation methods Charge the battery or replace the battery Operation methods

Find the cause from other symptoms

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

107

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code 4.1 DTC fault code list Fault Code

Definition

B110412

Front wiper enable output short to power supply

B110414

Front wiper enable output short to ground or open

B110512

Front wiper speed output short to power supply

B110514

Front wiper speed output short to ground or open

B110612

Rear defrost output short to power supply

B110614

Rear defrost output short to ground or open

B110E1E

Wiper pause switch short to ground

B112512

Rear washer output short to power supply

B112514

Rear washer output short to ground or open

B112612

Rear wiper output short to power supply

B112614

Rear wiper output short to ground or open

B112A11

Front washer switch stuck

B112B11

Rear washer switch stuck

B114011

Rear defrost switch stuck

B11EC04

RLS RS fault

B11ED04

RLS LS fault

B11EE04

RLS installation fault

U12E487

RLS response fault

4.2 B110412 Front Wiper Enable Output Short to Power Supply B110414 Front Wiper Enable Output Short to Ground or Open DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing 

Front wiper enable B110412

output short to power

DTC trigger conditions

conditions

—

supply

Front wiper enable output short to ground or open

With the ignition ON, front wiper enable relay is short



Wire fault

to power supply for 200ms



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Control unit fault

when the output is valid. 

B110414

With the ignition ON, front wiper enable relay is short

—

to ground or open for 200ms when the output is invalid.

108

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

Possible causes

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Diagnostic steps: 1. Check whether fuse FB34 (15A) of the front compartment electrical box is blown. −

Yes - Replace the fuse.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Check front wiper high speed relay J30 and front wiper low speed relay J29 for crack and abnormality and check the terminals for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No-Replace the front wiper high speed relay J30 and front wiper low speed relay J29 and clean the terminal.

3. Check whether front wiper high speed relay J30 and front wiper low speed relay J29 are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No-Replace the front wiper high speed relay J30 and front wiper low speed relay J29. Conditions

Multimeter connecting pins

Rated value

Constant state

Normal 30-87A conductive

Connectivity

Constant state

Common status 85-86

Connectivity

30-87

Connectivity

Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply supply voltage

4. Disconnect front wiper motor connector T6f and check whether wires between pins T18b/3 and T18b/10 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pins T6f/4 and T6f/5 of the front wiper motor connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

109

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether pins T6f/4 and T6f/5 of the front wiper motor connector are short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether pins T6f/4 and T6f/5 of the front wiper motor connector are short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

7. Check whether power supply and grounding of the body controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Replace the front wiper motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 9.

−

No-Replace the front wiper motor.

9. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

110

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4.3 B110512 Front Wiper Speed Output Short to Power Supply B110514 Front Wiper Speed Output Short to Ground or Open DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

B110512

Possible causes

With the ignition ON, front

Front wiper speed

wiper high speed relay is

output short to power

short to power supply for

supply

200ms when the output is



Wire fault



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Control unit fault

valid.  B110514

With the ignition ON, front

Front wiper speed

wiper high speed relay is

output short to ground

short to ground or open for

or open

200ms when the output is invalid.

Diagnostic steps: 1. Check whether fuse FB34 (15A) of the front compartment electrical box is blown. −

Yes - Replace the fuse.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Check front wiper high speed relay J30 and front wiper low speed relay J29 for crack and abnormality and check the terminals for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No-Replace the front wiper high and low speed relay J126 and clean the terminal.

3. Check whether front wiper high speed relay J30 and front wiper low speed relay J29 are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No-Replace the front wiper high speed relay J30 and front wiper low speed relay J29.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

111

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Conditions

Multimeter connecting pins

Rated value

Constant state

Common status 30-87A

Connectivity

Constant state

Common status 85-86

Connectivity

30-87

Connectivity

Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply supply voltage

4. Disconnect front compartment electrical box connector T16d and check whether wire between pin T16d/14 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin T40a/3 of the body controller connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T16d/14 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

112

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6. Check whether the pin T16d/14 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

7. Disconnect front compartment electrical box connector T20d and check whether the wire between pin T20d/2 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin T40a/6 of the body controller connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

113

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

8. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T20d/2 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 9.

9. Disconnect battery negative cable and check whether the pin T20d/2 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 10.

10. Check whether power supply and grounding of the body controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 11.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

11. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

114

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4.4 B110612 Rear Defrost Output Short to Power Supply B110614 Defrost Output Short to Ground or Open B114011 Rear Defrost Switch Stuck DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

B110612

Rear defrost output short to power supply

—

Possible causes

With the ignition ON, rear defrost relay is short to



Wire fault

power supply for 200ms



Control unit fault

defrost relay is short to



Wire fault

ground or open for 200ms



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Control unit fault

when the output is valid.  B110614

Rear defrost output short to ground or open

—

With the ignition ON, rear

when the output is invalid. B114011

Rear defrost switch stuck

 —

With the ignition ON, rear window defrost switch is valid for 15s.

1. Check whether the fuses RF42 (30A), RF43 (30A) and RF24 (7.5A) in the instrument panel electrical box are blown. −

Yes - Replace the fuse.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Check the rear defrost relay J114 for crack and abnormality and check the terminal for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No-Replace the rear defrost relay J114 and clean the terminal.

3. Check whether the rear defrost relay J114 is normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No-Replace the rear defrost relay J114

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

115

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Conditions

Multimeter connecting pins

Rated value

Constant state

Common status 85-86

Connectivity

30-87

Connectivity

Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply supply voltage

4. Disconnect body controller connector T40 and check whether the wire between pin T22b/12 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin T40a/23 of the body controller connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T22b/12 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

116

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6. Check whether the pin T22b/12 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

7. Disconnect positive terminal 1p of rear windscreen defrost heating wire and check whether the wire between pin T18d/17 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin T1p/1 at positive terminal of the rear windscreen defrost heating wire is conductive. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 8.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

117

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

8. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T18d/17 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 9.

9. Disconnect battery negative cable and check whether the pin T18d/17 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 10.

10. Replace (repair) rear windscreen defrost heating wire, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 11.

−

No-Replace (repair) rear windscreen defrost heating wire.

11. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

118

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4.5 B110E1E Wiper Pause Switch Short to Ground B112A11 Front Washer Switch Stuck B112B11 Rear Washer Switch Stuck DTC

B110E1E

B112A11

B112B11

DTC Definition Wiper pause switch short to ground Front washer switch stuck Rear washer switch stuck

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions  —

With

the

ignition

ON,

wiper pause switch is short to ground for 400ms 

—

With the ignition ON, front washer switch is valid for 15s.

 —

With the ignition ON, rear washer switch is valid for 15s.

Possible causes 

Wire fault



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect wiper combination switch connector T10m, check wiper combination switch connector T10m for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller connector T40a and check whether wires between pins T0m/1, T0m/2 and T0m/5 of the wiper combination switch connector and pins T40a/36, T40a/15 and T40a/35 of the body controller connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

119

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Check whether pins T0m/1, T0m/2, T0m/5, T10n/7, T10n/8 and T10n/10 of the wiper combination switch connector are short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 4.

4. Replace the wiper combination switch, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 6.

−

No-Replace the wiper combination switch.

5. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

4.6 B11EC04 RLS_RS Fault B11ED04 RLS_LS Fault B11EE04 RLS Installation Fault U12E487 RLS Response Fault DTC

B11EC04

B11ED04

B11EE04

DTC Definition

DTC testing

RLS_RS fault

RLS_LS fault

RLS installation fault

DTC trigger conditions

conditions —

—

—





LIN slave wire error



Wire fault



Control unit fault



LIN slave wire error



Control unit fault

configure data



LIN slave wire error

RLS Windshield=0 or RLS



Control unit fault

―RLS_RSErr‖ value is 1



―RLS_LSErr‖ value is 1



With

the

ignition

node internal fault

120

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

Possible causes

ON,

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

DTC

DTC Definition

U12E487

RLS response fault

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions —



―RLS_RespErr‖ value is 1

Possible causes 

LIN slave wire error



Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect rain sensor connector T4b, check rain sensor connector T4b for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Check whether fuse FB41 (5A) in the instrument panel electrical box is blown. −

Yes - Replace the fuse.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. With the ignition under ON status, check whether the voltage between pin T4b/1 of the rain sensor connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

121

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4. Disconnect body controller connector T40a and check whether the wire between pin T4b/2 of the rain sensor connector and pin T40a/16 of the body controller connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T4b/2 of the rain sensor connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

122

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6. Check whether the pin T4b/2 of the rain sensor connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 8.

7. Check whether pin T4b/3 of the rain sensor connector and the body grounding is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 9.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Replace the rain sensor

and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and

its symptoms remain. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 10.

−

No-Replace the rain sensor.

9. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

123

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4.7 B112512 Rear Washer Output Short to Power Supply B112514 Rear Washer Output Short to Ground or Open DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

Rear washer output

B112512

short to power supply

With the ignition ON, rear washing relay is short to

—

power supply for 200ms when the output is valid. 

Rear washer output

B112514

short to ground or open

—

With the ignition ON, rear washing relay is short to ground or open for 200ms when the output is invalid.

Possible causes 

Actuator error



Wire fault



Control unit fault



Actuator error



Wire fault



Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Check whether fuse FB35 (15A) of the front compartment electrical box is blown. −

Yes - Replace the fuse.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Check the rear washing relay J112 for crack and abnormality and check the terminal for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No-Replace the rear washing relay J112 and clean the terminal.

3. Check whether the rear washing relay J112 is normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No Replace the rear washing relay J112.

124

Conditions

Multimeter connecting pins

Rated value

Constant state

Common status 85-86

Connectivity

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Conditions Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply supply voltage

Multimeter connecting pins

Rated value

30-87

Connectivity

4. Disconnect front compartment electrical box connector T20d and check whether the wire between pin T20d/10 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin T40a/12 of the body controller connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T20d/10 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

125

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6. Check whether the pin T20d/10 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

7. Check whether power supply and grounding of the body controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Replace the front wiper motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes Proceed to Step 9.

−

No-Replace the front wiper motor.

9. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

4.8 B112612 Rear Wiper Output Short to Power Supply B112614 Rear Wiper Output Short to Ground or Open DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

B112612

Rear wiper output short to power supply

With the ignition ON, rear



LIN slave wire error



Wire fault



Control unit fault

wiper relay is short to



LIN slave wire error

ground or open for 200ms



Control unit fault

wiper relay is short to

—

power supply for 200ms when the output is valid. 

B112614

Rear wiper output short to ground or open

—

With the ignition ON, rear

when the output is invalid.

126

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

Possible causes

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Diagnostic steps: 1. Check whether fuse FB35 (15A) of the front compartment electrical box is blown. −

Yes - Replace the fuse.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Check the rear wiper relay J111 for crack and abnormality and check the terminal for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No-Replace the rear wiper relay J111 and clean the terminal.

3. Check whether rear wiper relay J111 is normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No-Replace the rear wiper relay J111.

Conditions

Multimeter connecting pins

Rated value

Constant state

Common status 85-86

Connectivity

30-87

Connectivity

Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply supply voltage

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

127

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4. Disconnect front compartment electrical box connector T22b and check whether the wire between pin T22b/19 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin T40a/33 of the body controller connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T22b/19 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

128

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6. Check whether the pin T22b/19 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

7. Disconnect rear wiper motor connector T3p and check whether the wire between pin T3p/3 of the rear wiper motor connector and pin T18d/18 of the front compartment electrical box connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

129

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

8. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T3p/3 of the rear wiper motor connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 9.

9. Check whether the pin T3p/3 of the rear wiper motor connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 10.

10. Check whether power supply and grounding of the body controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 11.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

11. Replace the front wiper motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 11.

−

No-Replace the front wiper motor.

12. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

130

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5 Front Wiper 5.1 Overview of front wiper

1 - Front wiper motor and connecting rod assembly

2 - Fixing bolt of front wiper motor and connecting rod mechanism



Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 135



Total: 3



Specification：M6×1.0×30



Tightening torque：8～10 Nm

3 - Fixing nut cap of the front wiper arm assembly

4 - Fixing nut of wiper arm assembly



Total: 2



Total: 2



Check, replace if necessary



Specification：M8×1.25



Tightening torque：18～22 Nm

5 - Front passenger side wiper arm

6 - Front passenger side wiper blade





Check, replace if necessary

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 132

7 - Turn over the driver side wiper arm.

8 - Driver side wiper blade





Check, replace if necessary

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 132

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

131

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5.2 Removal and installation of the front wiper blade 5.2.1 Removal and installation of the boneless front wiper blade Removal Tips 

Do not mix driver side wiper blade with that at the front passenger side in assembly.



The instruction is only for removal and installation of the driver side wiper blade, but may serve as a reference for removal and installation of the front passenger side wiper blade.

1. Turn over the driver side wiper arm. 2. Press the unlocking device -Arrow- and remove the driver side wiper blade -1-. Tips Proceed with caution to prevent damaging the front windscreen.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: 1. Push fixture of the front wiper blade to stop position of the wiper arm. 2. Turn the front wiper arm back onto the front windscreen carefully.

3. Operate the front wiper arm to reset position => Refer to page 136.

5.2.2 Removal and installation of the boned front wiper blade Removal Tips 

Do not mix driver side wiper blade with that at the front passenger side in assembly.



The instruction is only for removal and installation of the driver side wiper blade, but may serve as a reference for removal and installation of the front passenger side wiper blade.



Proceed with caution to prevent damaging the front windscreen.

132

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

1. Turn over the driver side wiper arm. 2 Turn the front wiper blade -1- along the direction of -Arrow- to be vertical to the wiper arm.

3. Hold the front wiper blade -1- and disengage and remove the front wiper blade from the wiper arm.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: 1. Push fixture of the front wiper blade to stop position of the wiper arm. Tips There is lock sound when the fixture is pushed to the stop position. 2. Turn the front wiper arm back onto the front windscreen carefully.

3. Operate the front wiper arm to reset position => General; Repair Group: 01; General information; Check and replace and maintain if necessary; Position of the window glass wiper blade; Check and adjustment.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

133

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5.3 Removal and installation of front wiper arm assembly Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

T61276401-Wiper arm puller

Removal Tips The instruction is only for removal and installation of the driver side wiper arm assembly, but may serve as a reference for removal and installation of the front passenger side wiper arm assembly. 1. Pry down the fixing nut cap -Arrow- of the driver side wiper arm assembly.

2. Unscrew fixing nut -Arrow- of the driver side wiper arm assembly -1-. Nut - Arrow- specification：M8×1.25 Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 18 - 22 Nm Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 13mm hexagon sleeve

134

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Extract the wiper arm assembly -1- using the wiper arm puller -T61276401-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: 1. Run the front wiper motor to its final position. With the ignition ON, open wiper component switch and switch off the ignition when the front wiper motor stops. Switch 2. Install the front wiper arm assembly in the final position of the wiper shaft, and tighten the fixing nuts with hands.

3. Adjust reset position of the wiper blade after installation => Refer to page 136. 4. Tighten the fixing nut according to the specified torque.

5.4 Removal and installation of front wiper motor and linkage assembly Removal 1. Operate the wiper to reset position.

2. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 3. Remove the ventilation trim panel component=> Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment; Removal and installation of the ventilation trim panel component. 4. Disengage the connecting plug -Arrow A- of the front wiper motor from its fixing support and disconnect connection between the connecting plug of the front wiper motor and the harness. 5. Unscrew the fixing bolt component -Arrow B- of front wiper motor and linkage assembly and remove front wiper motor and linkage assembly -1-. Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications：M6×1.0×30 Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque:8±10 Nm Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

135

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Tips If front wiper motor and linkage assembly deviate from the reset position in the course of operation, connect the plug before installation and operate slowly to reset.

5.5 Adjust reset position of the wiper blade 1. Run the wiper into the reset position and turn off the ignition switch. 2. Adjust reset position of the front windscreen wiper blade. Driver side: Whether tip of the front wiper blade is at the locating point -Arrow-.

Tips If necessary, adjust the installation position of the front wiper arm by unscrewing its mounting nut in order to adjust reset position of the front windscreen wiper blade. Front passenger side: Whether tip of the front wiper blade is at the locating point -Arrow-.

Tips If necessary, adjust the installation position of the front wiper arm by unscrewing its mounting nut in order to adjust reset position of the front windscreen wiper blade.

136

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6 Rear Wiper 6.1 Overview of rear wiper

1 - Rear wiper blade

2 - Fixing bolt component of the rear wiper motor assembly





Total: 3



Specification：M6×1.0×25



Tightening torque：8～10 Nm

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 138

3 - Rear wiper arm

4 - Fixing nut of rear wiper arm assembly





Total: 1



Specification：M8×1.25



Tightening torque：8～12 Nm

Check, replace if necessary

5 - Fixing nut cap of rear wiper arm assembly

6 - Rear wiper motor assembly





Check, replace if necessary

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 139

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

137

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6.2 Removal and installation of rear wiper blade Removal 1. Turn over the rear wiper arm assembly. 2. Turn the rear wiper blade backward to the extremity position, press the locking clip and remove the rear wiper blade -1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: 1. Push fixture of the rear wiper blade to stop position of the wiper arm. 2. Turn the rear wiper arm onto the rear windscreen carefully.

3. Operate the rear wiper arm to reset position => Refer to page 140.

6.3 Removal and installation of rear wiper arm assembly Removal 1. Open fixing nut cap -1- of the rear wiper arm assembly. 2. Unscrew fixing nut -Arrow- of the rear wiper arm assembly -2-. Nut - Arrow- specification：M8×1.25 Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 8 - 12 Nm Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 13mm hexagon sleeve

138

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Remove the rear wiper arm assembly -1- with tools.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: 1. Operate the rear wiper motor to reset position With the ignition ON, open wiper component switch and switch off the ignition when the rear wiper motor stops. Switch 2. Install the rear wiper arm assembly in the final position of the wiper shaft, and tighten the fixing nuts with hands.

3. Adjust reset position of the rear wiper blade after installation => Refer to page 140. 4. Tighten the fixing nut according to the specified torque.

6.4 Removal and installation of the rear wiper motor assembly Removal 1. Operate the wiper to reset position.

2. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 3. Remove the rear wiper arm assembly=>Refer to Page 138 . 4. Remove back door lower trim panel assembly => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 88; Back door; Removal and installation of the back door lower trim panel assembly. 5. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow A- of the rear wiper motor assembly. 6. Unscrew the fixing bolt component -Arrow B- of the rear wiper motor assembly and remove the rear wiper motor assembly -1-. Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications：M6×1.0×25 Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque:8±10 Nm Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

139

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Tips If rear wiper motor and linkage assembly deviate from the reset position in the course of operation, connect the plug before installation and operate slowly to reset.

6.5 Adjust reset position of the wiper blade 1. Run the wiper into the reset position and turn off the ignition switch. 2. Adjust reset position of the rear windscreen wiper blade. Keep the rear wiper arm assembly -1- facing the left side and regulate the rear wiper blade to be parallel to the second resistance wire (-Arrowarea).

Tips If necessary, adjust the installation position of the wiper arm by unscrewing its mounting nut in order to adjust reset position of the rear windscreen wiper blade.

140

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7 Washers System 7.1 Overview of front windscreen washing system

1 - Front windscreen nozzle assembly 

2 - Washing tank filler

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 145

3 - Washing tank assembly

4 - Front windshield washing pump





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 145

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 143

5 - Washing hose I

6 - Washing hose II





Check, replace if necessary

Check, replace if necessary

7 - Fixing bolt of the washing tank assembly 

Total: 4



Specification：M6×1.0×20



Tightening torque：6～8Nm

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

141

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7.2 Overview of rear windscreen washing system

1 - Rear windscreen nozzle assembly

2 - Washing hose II





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 146

Check, replace if necessary

3 - Washing hose I

4 - Rear windscreen washer pump





Check, replace if necessary

5 - Washing tank assembly 

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 145

7 - Fixing bolt of the washing tank assembly 

Total: 3



Specification：M6×1.0×20



Tightening torque：6～8 Nm

142

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 143

6 - Washing tank filler

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7.3 Removal and installation of washer pump 7.3.1 Removal and installation of the front windscreen washer pump Removal

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Remove right front wheel cover fender => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment: Front wheel cover fender; Removal and installation of the front wheel cover fender. 3. Remove the retaining buckle -Arrow A- of the front bumper lower protective panel, unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow B- and remove the front bumper lower protective panel -1-. Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications：M6×1.0×16 Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 8 - 12 Nm Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

4. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the front windscreen washer pump-1-. 5. Disengage connecting hose -2- of the front windscreen washer pump-1-. Tips Collect split cleaning fluid with a proper container when disengaging the washer pump hose. 6. Extract the front windscreen washer pump and sealing ring component -1- from the washing tank assembly. Tips Replace the sealing ring in every time removal. Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Tips Pay attention to correct installation of the sealing ring when installing the front windscreen washer pump. Fill the glass cleaning fluid to the standard level (around 3.0L).

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

143

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7.3.2 Removal and installation of the rear windscreen washer pump Removal

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Remove right front wheel cover fender => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment: Front wheel cover fender; Removal and installation of the front wheel cover fender. 3. Remove the retaining buckle -Arrow A- of the front bumper lower protective panel, unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow B- and remove the front bumper lower protective panel -1-. Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications：M6×1.0×16 Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 8 - 12 Nm Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve Tips 12 screws -Arrow A and 9 clips -Arrow B.

4. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the rear windscreen washer pump-2-. 5. Disengage connecting hose -1- of the rear windscreen washer pump -2-. Tips Collect split cleaning fluid with a proper container when disengaging the washer pump hose. 6. Extract rear windscreen washer pump -2- and sealing ring component out of the washing tank assembly. Tips Replace the sealing ring in every time removal. Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Tips Pay attention to correct installation of the sealing ring when installing the rear windscreen washer pump. Fill the glass cleaning fluid to the standard level (around 3.0L).

144

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7.4 Removal and installation of washing tank assembly Removal

1. Remove the front bumper component=>Vehicle Body and Painting; Repair Group:83; Exterior equipment; Removal and installation of front bumper component. 2. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow- of the washing tank assembly filler. Bolt - Arrow - Specifications：M6×1.0×20 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 6 - 8 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

3. Disengage the connector of the front windscreen washer pump -Arrow-A. the connector of the rear windscreen washer pump -Arrow-B. 4. Disengage washing pipelines -2- and -4- from the washing tank assembly. Tips Collect split cleaning fluid with a proper container when disengaging the washer pump hose. 5. Remove the front windscreen washer pump-1- and the rear windscreen washer pump-3-. 6. Unscrew the fixing bolt of the washing tank assembly-Arrow-C and remove the washing tank assembly. 螺栓-箭头 C-规格：M6×1.0×20 Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque: 6 - 8 Nm Bolt -Arrow C- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Tips Fill the glass cleaning fluid to the standard level.

7.5 Removal and installation of the front windscreen nozzle assembly Removal

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

145

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Tips The instruction is only for removal and installation of the left front windscreen nozzle assembly, but may serve as a reference for removal and installation of the right front windscreen nozzle assembly.

1. Remove the ventilation trim panel component=> Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment; Removal and installation of the ventilation trim panel component. 2. Disengage the washing hose -1- from the front windscreen nozzle -2-. 3. Press the fixing clip -Arrow- of the front windscreen nozzle and remove the front windscreen nozzle -2-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

7.6 Removal and installation of the rear windscreen nozzle assembly Removal

1. Remove spoiler component => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 88; Back door; Removal and installation of the spoiler component. 2. Press the fixing clip -Arrow- of the rear windscreen nozzle and remove the rear windscreen nozzle -1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

8 Washing Unit: Check Front windscreen washing device

146

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Spray: check 1. The spraying position is in the middle of

front windshield 1/3

arrow-A-.



Tips If the nozzle -Arrow- is blocked, stretch a needle or a fine wire into the hole to remove the obstacle.



Stretch a needle or a fine wire into the nozzle -Arrow B- to adjust the direction of spraying if necessary.

Rear windscreen washing device Spray: check 1. The spraying position of the rear washing device is at the left of the top scraping area on the rear windscreen, where the washer fluid may flow to. Tips  If the nozzle -Arrow- is blocked, stretch a needle or a fine wire into the hole to remove the obstacle. 

Stretch a needle or a fine wire into the nozzle -Arrow- to adjust the direction of spraying if necessary.

9 Removal and installation of the rain/light sensor Removal

1. Remove anti-dazzling interior rearview mirror => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 84; Interior equipment; Removal and installation of the anti-dazzling interior rearview mirror. 2. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow-of the rain/light sensor.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

147

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Turn locking ring -2- of the rain/light sensor -1- counterclockwise along the direction of -Arrow4. Remove the rain/light sensor -1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:



Tips Remove the transparent protective film before installing onto the bracket and do not touch flexible silica gel of the sensor.



Make sure the ignition is OFF and glass in the installation area is dry (water-free) and without dirt such as greasy dirt and fingerprint.



When the ignition is switched on, the sensor is first initialized and completes installation and fitting with the glass automatically.

148

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

66 Heating and Cooling System 1 Rear windscreen defrost system 1.1 Brief introduction The rear windscreen defrost system is a heating system for the time when the rear windscreen has fog, frost or moisture that heats the rear windscreen by the heating wire -1- at its bottom to clear fog, frost or moisture on the rear windscreen and bring a clear vision. Tips Be careful when cleaning the glass or removing dirt, stickers or adhesives from the glass. Sharp tools may damage or scrape the heating wire. It is recommended to use a cleaning cloth or towel dipped in glass cleaner or hot water to clean the glass.

1.2 How it works With the ignition ON (after engine start), open rear windscreen defrost switch -Arrow- on the air-conditioning control panel, so the battery will supply power to the rearview mirror glass (if any)/the rear windscreen heating wire that will heat the rearview mirror glass (if any)/the rear windscreen to help to remove frost or mist on the surface of the rearview mirror glass (if any)/the rear windscreen.

Note After initial operation for about 15 minutes, the heating system will shut down automatically. In the 15 minutes after the heating system is turned on, press the rear windscreen defrost switch again to turn off the heating system.

1.3 Inspection of rear windscreen defrost heating wire 1. With the ignition ON (after engine start), open rear windscreen defrost switch on the air-conditioning control panel and touch the rear windscreen or the rearview mirror to check the working condition of the heating system. After 4 minutes, obvious temperature difference may be detected on the glass and the rearview mirror close to terminals -1- and -2- of the rear windscreen heating wire. 2. If no temperature difference is detected, use a 12V voltmeter to measure the voltage between terminals -1- and -2- of the rear windscreen heating wire, which should be the battery voltage. If the voltage of battery cannot be read from the voltmeter, please carry out the following inspections: a. Confirm that the ignition is ON.

Repair Group 66 - Heating and cooling system

149

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

b. Check the conductivity between the negative terminal

and the body grounding.

c. Check the heating relays and fuses in the vehicle fuse box.

1.4 Removal and installation of rear windscreen defrost relay Removal

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Remove fuse cover plate -1- on the instrument panel.

3. Disconnect the rear windscreen defrost relay -Arrow-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

150

Repair Group 66 - Heating and cooling system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

1.5 Removal and installation of rear windscreen defrost switch As the rear windscreen defrost switch -Arrow- is integrated in the air conditioning control panel, it cannot be repaired separately. The entire air-conditioning control panel must be replaced if faulty or damaged.

2 Rearview mirror heating (if any) 2.1 Brief introduction The rearview mirror heating is working together with the rear windscreen defrost system. The rearview mirror heating can promptly remove the fog frost, and moisture on the rearview mirror, thus providing a clear vision and improving road safety.

2.2 How it works With the ignition ON （after start-up of engine）, press the rear windscreen defrost switch on the air conditioning controller -Arrow-, so the battery will supply power to the rearview mirror/rear windscreen heating wire, which will heat the rearview mirror/rear windscreen, to help remove frost or mist on the glass surface.

Note After initial operation for about 15 minutes, the heating system will shut down automatically. In the 15 minutes after the heating system is turned on, press the rear windscreen defrost switch again to turn off the heating system. The heating wire behind the exterior rearview mirror glass is irreparable, which if failed or damaged, the rearview mirror lens must be replaced.

2.3 Removal and installation of the rearview mirror heating wire Removal Tips The rearview mirror heating wire is integrated with the lens that must be removed and installed together with the lens.

Repair Group 66 - Heating and cooling system

151

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Pry out exterior rearview mirror lens -1- at the position of -Arrowwith tools. Tips Pay attention to the force exerted for fear of damage to the exterior rearview mirror lens -1-.

3. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the exterior rearview mirror lens wire and remove the exterior rearview mirror lens -1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

152

Repair Group 66 - Heating and cooling system

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

67 Parking Distance Control System 1 Reversing Radar System 1.1 System overview Reversing radar system The reversing radar with use of ultrasonic testing technique reminds whether there is any obstacle and the distance of the obstacle behind the vehicle in reversing by sound and image manner so as to assist the driver to park safely and avoid crash. Characteristics of reversing radar system: 

The single-transmitting & multi-receiving sensor features accurate detection, compact structure and sensitive sensing and is resistant to water, dust and shock.



The control module applied with microprocessor (MCU) control technology and optimized circuit design has stable performance and endurance.



The audible alarm lets the driver know approximate distance and orientation of the obstacle behind the vehicle and thus facilitates parking.



Powered-on self-test (POST) function.

1.2 Technical parameters Name The fixing bolt of the reversing radar control unit

Specification

Grade

M6×1.0×15

8.8

Torque Nm 5～7

Tools 8mm Hexagon Sleeve

1.3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting 1.3.1 The entire reversing radar system not working No.

Inspection steps

0

Preliminary Inspection Check whether the fuse is blown

1

Check the automatic transmission control unit

Check results Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 1.

Fuse blown

Replace the fuse

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Check whether the automatic transmission

Proceed to Step 2.

control unit is normal 2

Check the circuit of the reversing radar control unit

Normal

reversing radar control unit

The reversing radar Proceed to Step 3.

Check the reversing radar control unit

control unit short or open

is normal 3

control unit damaged There's a fault

Check whether the power supply for the circuit of the

Automatic transmission

Normal

There's a fault

Replace the automatic transmission control unit Operation methods

Repair or replace the harness

Operation methods

Repair Group 67 - Parking Distance Control System

153

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

No.

4

5

Inspection steps Check whether the reversing radar control unit damaged Check the vehicle body controller Check the vehicle body controller for damages Check the operation After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether the fault is still there.

Check results Proceed to Step 4.

Reversing radar control unit damaged

Replace the reversing radar control unit

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Normal

Whether the body controller is damaged There's a fault

Replace the vehicle body controller Operation methods

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

Find the cause from other symptoms

Proceed to Step 5.

1.3.2 Reverse gear engaged, buzzer sounding constantly No. 0

1

2

3

Inspection steps Preliminary Inspection Check whether there are foreign objects(e.g. sludge and water, etc.) on the surface of the reversing radar probe Check the reversing radar control unit Check whether the reversing radar control unit damaged Check the vehicle body controller Check the vehicle body controller for damages Check the operation After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether the fault is still there.

Normal

Check results There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 1.

Foreign objects (e.g. sludge, water, etc.) on the surface of the reversing radar probe

Remove the foreign objects

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 2.

Reversing radar control unit damaged

Replace the reversing radar control unit

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Normal

Whether the body controller is damaged There's a fault

Replace the vehicle body controller Operation methods

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

Find the cause from other symptoms

Proceed to Step 3.

1.3.3 The radar is not working when the reverse gear is engaged No. 0

1

2

154

Inspection steps Preliminary Inspection Check whether power supply for the circuit of the reversing radar control unit is normal Check the reversing radar probe Check whether the reversing radar probe is normal Check the reversing radar control unit

Normal

Check results There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 1.

The reversing radar control unit short or open

Repair or replace the harness

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 2.

Reversing radar probe damaged

Replace the reversing radar probe

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Repair Group 67 - Parking Distance Control System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

No.

Inspection steps

Check results

Check whether the reversing radar control unit

Reversing radar control

Replace the reversing

unit damaged

radar control unit

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

Proceed to Step 3.

damaged 3

Check the operation After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether the fault is still there.

Find the cause from other symptoms

1.4 Overview of reversing radar

1 - Replace the reversing radar probe

2 - Sealing ring of the reversing radar probe





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 157

Check, replace if necessary

3 - Reversing radar probe bracket

4 - Replace the reversing radar control unit





Check, replace if necessary

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 156

5 - The fixing bolt of the reversing radar control unit 

Total: 2



Specification：M6×1.0×15



Tightening torque：5～7 Nm

Repair Group 67 - Parking Distance Control System

155

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

1.5 Removal and installation of the reversing radar control unit. Removal Tips The reversing radar control unit is located behind the right rear wheel cover trim panel assembly.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Remove wheel cover trim panel assembly => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 84; Interior equipment: Trim part and trim panel: Removal and installation of the wheel cover trim panel assembly. 3. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow- of the reversing radar control unit and remove the reversing radar control unit -1-. Bolt - Arrow - Specifications：M6×1.0×15 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 5 - 7 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 8mm hexagon sleeve

4. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the reversing radar control unit and remove the reversing radar control unit -1-.

156

Repair Group 67 - Parking Distance Control System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Tips Check alarm functions of the reversing radar after installation.

1.6 Reversing radar probe 1.6.1 Removal and installation of reversing radar probe Removal Tips The instruction is only for removal and installation of the left reversing radar probe, but may serve as a reference for removal and installation of the right reversing radar probe.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Disengage the lock piece -Arrow A- of the reversing radar probe bracket and remove the left front reversing radar probe -1-. 3. Disengage the the connecting plug -Arrow B- of the left reversing radar probe and remove the left reversing radar probe-1-.

Note If excessive force is applied to the probe, it may generate fine cracks and cause malfunction. Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Tips 

Pay attention to installation position of the reversing radar probe.



When installing the reversing radar probe -1-, make sure the two locking lugs -Arrow A- of the reversing radar probe are clamped into the locking slot -Arrow B- of the reversing radar probe bracket -2-.



The annular gap between the head of the reversing radar probe and the bumper component must be even.

Repair Group 67 - Parking Distance Control System

157

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

1.6.2 Inspection of reversing radar probe The reversing radar probe must be kept clean. If dirt and dust are stuck to the surface of sensor, rinse it with low pressure waterspout. Do not clean the surface of the reversing radar probe with sandpaper, screwdriver or other sharp tools; otherwise, it may affect the detection accuracy or cause permanent damage. Tips In case of any accumulation on the surface of the reversing radar probe, do not rinse the probe directly with high pressure water gun at a short distance when washing the vehicle. Note The following conditions may affect the performance of the sensor detecting obstacles, pay attention during inspection. 

The front/rear bumper panel or the reversing radar probe get strong impact.



The surface of reversing radar probe is covered with a layer of moisture, water, dirt, snow or ice.



The reversing radar probe is frozen.



The vehicle inclines obviously when reversing.



The vehicle is reversing on particularly bumpy road, slope, macadam or grass.



Under burning sun or in cold weather.



The surrounding of the vehicle is quite noisy.For example, there are cars horning, motorcycle engine sound, brake sound of a large vehicle or other strong noise with ultrasonic wave.



Reverse speed is too high.

158

Repair Group 67 - Parking Distance Control System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2 Rearview Camera System 2.1 System overview General descriptions The rearview camera system is a camera installed on the back door of the vehicle that shots image of the vehicle behind and transmits to the on-board display to be displayed there to assist the driver in parking. When reversing the vehicle and parking at a narrow stall, the driver may see the vehicle rear image clearly on the display transmitted by the rear camera. In this way, the system assists the driver to park safely and easily and avoids crash and scratch of the vehicle body. The rearview camera system has following characteristics: 

In the rearview camera system, the camera device installed at the back of the vehicle clearly indicates the obstacle behind the vehicle through the on-board screen.



The on-board display applies TFT true color after anti-magnetic treatment that is free from signal interference and strobe flash.

Normal functions of the rearview camera system 

The rearview camera would disappear when the reversing speed is over 15km/h and restores displaying when the vehicle speed reduces from 15km/h to 12km/h.



The rearview camera system stops completely when the reverse gear is quit.



In normal working: the camera shots the image within the imaging area behind the vehicle that is then displayed on the display.

2.2 Fault symptoms and troubleshooting 2.2.1 Rearview camera display not working No. 0

1

2

3

Inspection steps Preliminary Inspection Check whether the power supply for the rearview camera display is normal; Check whether the connection between the harness and the connector is normal. Check whether the reversing switch works normally Check whether the rearview camera display is damaged Reversing switch or gearshift switch Check whether the automatic transmission control unit is damaged Check the operation After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether the fault is still there.

Check results There's a fault

Normal

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 1.

Power supply for the rearview camera display short or open

Repair the power supply circuit

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 2.

Inside of rearview camera display breaks down or pins corrosive

Replace the rearview camera display

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 3.

Automatic transmission control unit damaged

Normal

There's a fault

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

Replace the automatic transmission control unit Operation methods Find the cause from other symptoms

Repair Group 67 - Parking Distance Control System

159

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2.2.2 Rearview camera not working No.

Inspection steps

0

Preliminary Inspection Check rearview camera fuse

1

Check results Normal Proceed to Step 1.

Check the power supply of

Normal

rearview camera Check whether the circuit of the rearview camera is

Proceed to Step 2.

normal 2

Check the rearview camera

Normal

blown There's a fault The rearview camera circuit short or open

Operation methods

Repair the circuit

Rearview camera

Replace the rearview

damaged

camera

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

Proceed to Step 3.

Check the operation After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether

Replace the fuse

Operation methods

damaged 3

Rearview camera fuse

Operation methods

There's a fault

Check whether the rearview camera is

There's a fault

the fault is still there.

Find the cause from other symptoms

2.3 Removal and installation of rearview camera Removal

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Remove back door lower trim panel assembly => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 88; Back door; Removal and installation of the back door lower trim panel assembly. 3. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow A- of the rearview camera. 4. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow B- of the back door and disengage the connection between the connector and the back door metal plate.

160

Repair Group 67 - Parking Distance Control System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Unscrew the screw -Arrow- and remove the cover plate -1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 4 Nm

6. Press the fixing clip in the direction of -Arrow- and remove the camera -1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check functions of the rearview camera after installation.

Repair Group 67 - Parking Distance Control System

161

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

68 Anti-theft Security System 1 Anti-theft Alarm System 1.1 Brief introduction 1.1.1 General descriptions Start the vehicle with a mechanical key

Door not closing switch

Right rear door lock

Door not closing switch

Right front door lock

lamp

Right side turn signal

low-tone horns

Fuel pump

High-tone horn and

Control Sharing of information

Anti-theft base Ignition coil

Engine control

Intelligent remote key

unit

Tailgate lock BCM Not closing switch

Instrument cluster

Hood micro-open

On-board switch

Door not closing

Left rear door lock

switch

Door not closing

Left front door lock

lamp

Left side turn signal

switch

information center

1.

The vehicle applies following anti-theft measures.

2.

A multi-point and combined anti-theft system is built for the vehicle model based on its on-board network system that is able to realize anti-theft local alarm and remote alarm.

3.

The anti-theft coil will sense the wrong key security code when the improper ignition key is inserted into the ignition, and send out signals to the body control module and Electronic Control Unit (ECU) to prevent the engine from starting and the vehicle from being stolen.

4.

When the vehicle locking anti-theft system is ON, the anti-theft is started automatically in case of illegal entry with warning of high-tone horn and low-tone horns.

5.

If the engine is shut down under the case, the engine control unit receives anti-theft status command from the body controller to prevent start of engine and realize the anti-theft purpose.

6.

When the vehicle anti-theft is not triggered, the body controller sends anti-theft OFF command to the engine control unit and the engine will work normally.

162

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

1.1.2 Overview of anti-theft system functions Triggering conditions of the alarm status The vehicle enters anti-theft status when it is locked with the remote key, when all doors, hood and the back door are under the monitoring status. The alarm is triggered once any door, back door or the hood is open, for instance any vehicle door is opened forcibly. After the anti-theft alarm is triggered, all turn signals flash and high-tone horn and low-tone horns honk. Release method after triggering of the alarm status When unlocking button on the remote key is pressed, the anti-theft alarm status is released, turn signals stop flashing, high-tone horn and low-tone horns stop honking and the vehicle is unlocked.

1.2 Technical parameters Tightening torque Name

Torque

Specification

Grade

M6×1.0

8

6～8

The fixing screw of the steering column lower guard

—

—

1.3～1.9

—

The fixing screw of the ignition lock key switch

—

—

2～3

—

Body controller fixing nut

Nm

Tools 10mm Hexagon Sleeve

1.3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting The high-tone horn stops honking when the anti-theft alarm is triggered No.

Inspection steps

0

Preliminary Inspection

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Check horn fuse

Proceed to Step 1.

Fuse blown

Replace the fuse

Check the horn

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

1

Check whether the speaker is damaged 2

Check the horn control circuit Check whether the horn circuit is faulty

3

Check the vehicle body controller Check for fault of the body controller

4

Check the operation

Check results

High-tone horn and Proceed to Step 2.

low-tone horns damaged

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Horn circuit short or

Repair the horn control

open

circuit

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 4.

Body controller fault

Normal

There's a fault

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

Proceed to Step 3.

After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether

Replace the horn

the fault is still there.

Replace the vehicle body controller Operation methods Find the cause from other symptoms

All turn signals stop flashing when the anti-theft alarm is triggered

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

163

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

No.

Inspection steps

0

Preliminary Inspection

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Check body controller fuse

Proceed to Step 1.

Fuse blown

Replace the fuse

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

The turn signal circuit

Repair the control

short or open

circuit of the turn signal

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 3.

Body controller fault

Normal

There's a fault

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

1

Check the turn signal control circuit Check whether the turn signal circuit is faulty

2

Check results

Proceed to Step 2.

Check the vehicle body controller Check for fault of the body controller

3

Check the operation After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether the fault is still there.

1.4 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code 1.4.1 DTC Fault Code List Fault Code

164

Definition

U007300

PCAN bus closed

U100700

BCAN bus closed

U010000

Loss of communication with EMS

U010100

Loss of communication with TCU

U015500

Loss of communication with MIU (ICM)

U016400

Loss of communication with ACC

U023100

Loss of communication with RLS

U015100

Loss of communication with SDM

U100587

Network management limp

B110004

Internal faults

B111651

EOL not programmed

B111717

Battery Voltage is Too High

B111716

Lower battery voltage

B111B71

Trunk release switch stuck

B11271D

Right front window output overcurrent

B11281D

Right rear window output overcurrent

B11291D

Left rear window output overcurrent

B113600

EMS transmission defective

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

Replace the vehicle body controller Operation methods Find the cause from other symptoms

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Fault Code

Definition

B113912

Horn output short to power supply

B113914

Horn output short to ground or open

B114111

Rearview mirror folding/unfolding switch stuck

B11841D

Driver’s window output overcurrent

1.4.2 U007300 PCAN Bus Closed U100700 BCAN Bus Closed U010000 Loss of Communication with EMS U010100 Loss of Communication with TCU U015100 Loss of Communication with SDM U015500 Loss of Communication with MIU (ICM) U016400 Loss of Communication with ACC U024500 Loss of Communication with EHU (HUM) U015100 Loss of Communication with SDM U100587 Network Management Limp B111651 EOL Not Programmed B113600 EMS Transmission Defective DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

U007300

PCAN bus closed

 U100700

U010000

U010100

U015500

BCAN bus closed

Loss of communication with EMS

Loss of communication with TCU

Loss of communication with MIU (ICM)

No successful information transmission

—

 —

of

two

busoff status



Control unit fault

No successful information



Communication

of

two 

Wire fault

busoff status



Control unit fault



Communication

BCM

cannot

receive

frame

within

BCM

cannot

receive

frame

within

continuous 15S

—

connection fault

continuous buses under the

0x3E0



connection fault Wire fault

continuous 15S

—

Communication



0x1A0





continuous buses under the

transmission

—

Possible causes

BCM

cannot

receive

0x620

frame

within

continuous 15S

Repair Group 68

connection fault 

Wire fault



Control unit fault



Communication connection fault



Wire fault



Control unit fault



Communication connection fault



Wire fault



Control unit fault

- Anti-theft Security System

165

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

DTC

U016400

U015100

DTC Definition

DTC testing

Loss of communication with ACC

Loss of communication

U100587

B111651

DTC trigger conditions

conditions

with SDM

Network management limp

EOL not programmed

 —

EMS transmission defective

cannot

receive

0x530

frame

within

continuous 15S  —

BCM

cannot

receive

0x350

frame

within

continuous 15S

—

—





—

 

Wire fault



Control unit fault



Communication connection fault



Wire fault



Control unit fault



Communication connection fault



Wire fault



Control unit fault



Communication

Read EOL data with the ignition ON, Bit0 is 0 With

the

EMS

challenge

frame

is

within

ignition not 2s

ON,

request received following

successful verification

Communication connection fault

Limphome status lasts for 2000ms

 B113600

BCM

Possible causes

connection fault 

Wire fault



Control unit fault



Communication connection fault



Wire fault



Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect body controller connectors T40a, T15, T18c, T9 and T40b, check body controller connectors T40a, T15, T18c, T9, and T40b for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Check whether the fuses FB48 (7.5A), FB41 (5A), FB20 (25A), FB22 (25A), FB19 (25A), FB21 (25A), FB18 (30A), FB23 (25A) and FB17 (25A) in the instrument panel electrical box are blown. −

Yes - Replace the fuse.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

166

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. With the ignition under ON status, check whether the voltage between pin T40a/18 of the body controller connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

4. Check whether the voltage between pin T40a/19 of the body controller connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

167

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the voltage between pins T9/1, T9/2, T9/3 and T9/4 of body controller connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 6.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

6. Check whether the voltage between pins T9/6 and T9/9 of body controller connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

168

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7. Check whether the wire between pin T40b/5 of the body controller connector and the body grounding is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Check whether wires between pins T15/2, T15/7, T15/9 and T15/14 of the body controller connector and the body grounding are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 9.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

169

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

9. Check whether the wires between pins T18c/7 and T18c/15 of the body controller connector and the body grounding are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 10.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

10. Check whether the wire between pin T40a/20 of the body controller connector and pin T6i/ST2 of the ignition connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 11.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

170

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

11. Disconnect instrument cluster connector T32a and check whether wires between pins T40a/36 and T40a/37 of the body controller connector and pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the instrument cluster connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 12.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

12. Disconnect the engine control unit connector T112 and check whether wires between pins T112/17 and T112/1 of the engine control unit connector and pins T40a/9 and T40a/8 of

the body controller

connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 13.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

171

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

13. Disconnect connector T24a of the automatic transmission control unit and check whether wires between pins T24a/7 and T24a/17 of the automatic transmission control unit connector and pins T40a/9 and T40a/8 of the body controller connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 14.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

14. Check whether wires between pins T16j/11 and T16j/3 of the OBD diagnostic interface connector and pins T40b/36 and T40b/37 of the body controller connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 15.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

15. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

1.4.3 B110004 system internal fault DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

B110004

Internal faults

—

EEPROM detects

error,

error

and

Possible causes

RAM SPI

communication defective

172

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System



Control unit fault

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Diagnostic steps: 1. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes, find out the reasons from other symptoms.

−

No, replace the body controller.

1.4.4 B111717 Battery Overvoltage B111716 Battery Undervoltage DTC

B111717

DTC Definition Battery Voltage is Too High

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions  —

is constantly higher than 16V for more than 500ms 

B111716

Lower battery voltage

The power supply voltage

—

The power supply voltage is constantly lower than 9V for more than 500ms

Possible causes 

Wire fault



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: Check whether the battery charging circuit is normal and check whether the terminal is loose or corrosive. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire and tighten or clean the terminal.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Check whether the fuses FB48 (7.5A), FB41 (5A), FB20 (25A), FB22 (25A), FB19 (25A), FB21 (25A), FB18 (30A), FB23 (25A) and FB17 (25A) in the instrument panel electrical box are blown. −

Yes - Replace the fuse.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. Check whether the battery voltage is within the normal range. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No-Overhaul or replace the battery.

4. Disconnect body controller connectors T40a, T15, T18c, T9 and T40b, check body controller connectors T40a, T15, T18c, T9, and T40b for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

173

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. With the ignition under ON status, check whether the voltage between pin T40a/18 of the body controller connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 6.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

6. Check whether the voltage between pin T40a/19 of the body controller connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

174

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the voltage between pins T9/1, T9/2, T9/3 and T9/4 of body controller connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Check whether the voltage between pins T9/6 and T9/9 of body controller connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 9.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

175

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

9. Check whether the wire between pin T40b/5 of the body controller connector and the body grounding is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 10.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

10. Check whether wires between pins T15/2, T15/7, T15/9 and T15/14 of the body controller connector and the body grounding are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 11.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

176

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

11. Check whether the wires between pins T18c/7 and T18c/15 of the body controller connector and the body grounding are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 12.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

12. Check whether the wire between pin T40a/20 of the body controller connector and pin T6i/ST2 of the ignition connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 13.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

13. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

1.4.5 U023100 Loss of Communication with RLS DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions

Possible causes 

U023100

Loss of communication with RLS

—



―RLS_LIN‖ node is lost for continuous 2s

Repair Group 68

Communication connection fault



Wire fault



Control unit fault

- Anti-theft Security System

177

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect rain sensor connector T4b, check rain sensor connector T4b for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Check whether fuse FB41 (5A) in the instrument panel electrical box is blown. −

Yes - Replace the fuse.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. With the ignition under ON status, check whether the voltage between pin T4b/1 of the rain sensor connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

4. Disconnect body controller connector T40a and check whether the wire between pin T4b/2 of the rain sensor connector and pin T40a/16 of the body controller connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

178

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T4b/2 of the rain sensor connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

7. Check whether the pin T4b/2 of the rain sensor connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 8.

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

179

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

8. Check whether pin T4b/3 of the rain sensor connector and the body grounding is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 9.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

9. Replace the rain sensor

and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and

its symptoms remain. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 10.

−

No-Replace the rain sensor.

10. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

1.4.6 B11841D Driver’s Window Output Overcurrent DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

B11841D

Driver’s window output overcurrent

—

Possible causes

With the ignition ON, the motor is overcurrent for



Wire fault

200ms when the driver’s



Control unit fault

window output is OFF. Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect connector T2dj of the left front door window regulator motor, check connector T2dj of the left front door window regulator motor for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

180

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller connector T15 and check whether the wires between pins T2dj/2 and T2dj/1 of the left front door window regulator motor connector and pins T15/15 and T15/12 of body controller connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

3. Check whether pins T2dj/2 and T2dj/1 of the left front door window regulator motor connector are short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 4.

4. Replace the left front regulator switch, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No-Replace the left front regulator switch.

5. Check whether power supply and grounding of the left front door window regulator motor are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 6.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

6. Replace the left front door window regulator motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No-Replace the left front door window regulator motor.

7. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain.

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

181

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

−

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

1.4.7 B11271D Right Front Window Output Overcurrent DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

B11271D

Right front window output overcurrent

Possible causes

With the ignition ON, the motor is overcurrent for

—

200ms

when

the

passenger’s window output



Wire fault



Control unit fault

is OFF. Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect connector T2dh of right front door window regulator motor, check connector T2dh of right front door window regulator motor for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller connector T15 and check whether wires between pins T2dh/1 and T2dh/2 of the right front door window regulator motor connector and pins T15/13 and T15/10 of the body controller connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

182

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Check whether pins T2dh/1 and T2dh/2 of the right front door window regulator motor connector are short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 4.

4. Replace the right front door window regulator motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No-Replace the right front door window regulator motor.

5. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

1.4.8 B11281D Right Rear Window Output Overcurrent DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

B11281D

Right rear window output overcurrent

—

Possible causes

With the ignition ON, the motor is overcurrent for



Wire fault

200ms when the right rear



Control unit fault

window output is OFF. Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect connector T2df of right rear door window regulator motor, check connector T2df of right rear door window regulator motor for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

183

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller connector T15 and check whether wires between pins T2df/1 and T2df/2 of the right rear door window regulator motor connector and pins T15/6 and T15/3 of the body controller connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

3. Check whether pins T2df/1 and T2df/2 of the right rear door window regulator motor connector are short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 4.

4. Replace the right rear door window regulator motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No-Replace the right rear door window regulator motor.

5. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

184

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

1.4.9 B11291D Left Rear Window Output Overcurrent DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

B11291D

Left rear window output overcurrent

—

Possible causes

With the ignition ON, the motor is overcurrent for



Wire fault

200ms when the left rear



Control unit fault

window output is OFF. Diagnostic steps: 1.4 Disconnect left rear door window regulator motor connector T2db, check left rear door window regulator motor connector T2db for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller connector T15 and check whether wires between pins T2db/1 and T2db/2 of the left rear door window regulator motor connector and pins T15/1 and T15/4 of the body controller connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

185

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Check whether pins T2db/1 and T2db/2 of the left rear door window regulator motor connector are short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 4.

4. Replace the left rear door window regulator motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No-Replace the left rear door window regulator motor.

5. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

1.4.10 B113912 Horn Output Short to Power Supply B113914 Horn Output Short to Ground or Open DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

B113912

Horn output short to power supply

—

Possible causes

With the ignition ON, horn relay is short to power



Wire fault

supply for 200ms when the



Control unit fault

relay is short to ground or



Wire fault

open for 200ms when the



Control unit fault

output is valid.  B113914

Horn output short to ground or open

—

With the ignition ON, horn

output is invalid. Diagnostic steps: 1. Check whether the fuse FB07 (15A) in the instrument panel electrical box is blown. −

Yes - Replace the fuse.

186

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

−

No Proceed to step 2.

Check the high beam relay J109, check the horn relay J109 for crack and abnormality and check the terminal for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No-Replace the horn relay J109 and clean the terminal.

3. Check whether the horn relay J109 is normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No Replace the horn relay J109.

Conditions

Multimeter connecting pins

Rated value

Constant state

Common status 85-86

Connectivity

30-87

Connectivity

Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply supply voltage

4. Disconnect body controller connector T40b and front compartment electrical box connector T14a and check whether the wire between pin T14a/1 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin T40b/23 of the body controller connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

187

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T14a/1 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether the pin T14a/1 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

188

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7. Disconnect low-tone horn connector T2ab and high-tone horn connector T2ac and check whether wires between pin T14a/11 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin T2ab/1 of low-tone horn connector and pin T2ac/1 of high-tone horn connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T14a/11 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 9.

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

189

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

9. Check whether the pin T14a/11 of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 10.

10. Replace the high-tone horn and low-tone horn, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 11.

−

No-Replace the high-tone horn and low-tone horn.

11. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

1.4.11 B114111 Rearview mirror folding/unfolding switch stuck DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing 

Rearview mirror B114111

DTC trigger conditions

conditions

folding/unfolding

—

switch stuck

With

the

rearview

ignition mirror

ON,

folding

switch is valid for 15s.

Possible causes 

Wire fault



Control unit fault

DTC detection procedures: Diagnostic steps: Tips After the fault is solved, verify DTC again and check whether the symptom is still present. 1. Replace the rearview mirror adjustment switch, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 6.

−

No-Replace the rearview mirror adjustment switch.

2. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain.

190

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

−

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

1.4.12

B111B71 Trunk release switch stuck

DTC

B111B71

DTC Definition Trunk release switch stuck

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions  —

With the ignition ON, rear back

door

unlocking

button is valid for 15s.

Possible causes 

Wire fault



Control unit fault

DTC detection procedures: Diagnostic steps: Tips After the fault is solved, verify DTC again and check whether the symptom is still present. 1. Disconnect trunk door lock motor connector T4p, check trunk door lock motor connector T4p for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller connector T40b and check whether the wire between pin T4p/D of the trunk door lock motor connector and pin T40b/30 of the body controller connector is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

191

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Check whether the pin T4p/D of the trunk door lock motor connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 4.

4. Replace the trunk door lock motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No-Replace the trunk door lock motor.

5. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

192

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

1.5 Overview of the anti-theft system

1 - Anti-theft base

2 - Body controller





Check, replace if necessary

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 194

3 - Back door open button

4 - Back door lock assembly





Check, replace if necessary

Removal and installation => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 88; Back door; Removal and installation of the back door lock body assembly

5 - Rear door switch

6 - Back door lock assembly





Check, replace if necessary

Removal and installation => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 87; Rear door; Removal and installation of the rear door lock body assembly

7 - Front door switch

8 -Front door lock assembly





Check, replace if necessary

Removal and installation => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 86; Front door; Removal and installation of front door lock assembly

9 - Engine hood master lock body assembly 

Removal and installation => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 81; Hood: Removal and installation of hood master lock body assembly

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

193

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

1.6 Removal and installation of body controller Removal

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Removal of the left lower trim panel of the instrument panel=>Body and painting;Repair group:82;Instrument panel;Removal and installation of the left lower trim panel of the instrument panel 3. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow- of the fuse box -1- and put the fuse box aside. Bolt - Arrow - Specifications：M6×1.0×25 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 6 - 10 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 8mm hexagon sleeve

4. Press the locking clip of the connector -1- and disengage the connector from the body controller -2-. 5. Unscrew the nut -Arrow- and remove the body controller -2- with a bracket from the vehicle body. Nut - Arrow- specification：M6×1.0 Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 6 - 8 Nm Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 10mm hexagon sleeve

6. Press the fixing clip in the direction of -Arrow- and disengage the body controller -1- from the bracket-2-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

194

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Set the ignition ON (not necessarily to start the engine) after replacement of the body controller and configure the body control unit according to hints of the diagnostic tester. Connect the diagnostic tester for testing.

2 Ignition Switch Assembly 2.1 Removal and installation of the steering column lock assembly Tips Steering column lock cylinder and steering column are integrated that are inseparable.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Adjust the steering column to its limit position.

3. Remove ignition=> Refer to page 196. 4. Disengage the fixing clip -Arrow C- of the combination switch harness from the steering column. 5. Disconnect fixing strip -1- of key anti-forgotten switch harness, disengage the connection -Arrow A- between the connecting plug of the key anti-forgotten switch harness and the harness, and remove the anti-forgotten switch -2-. Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

6. Disengage the connection between the connecting plug -Arrow- of the anti-theft base and the steering column. 7. Disconnect the connection between the connecting plug of the anti-theft base and the harness.

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

195

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

8. Disengage fixing clip -Arrow- of the anti-theft base and remove the anti-theft base -1-. 9. Disengage fixing clip of the combination switch harness from the steering column lock assembly.

10. Unscrew anti-theft bolt -Arrow- with tools and remove the steering column lock -1-. Tips Tightening torque for bolt -Arrow-: tighten the anti-theft bolt until the cracking part is twisted off.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Connect the diagnostic tester for testing.

2.2 Removal and installation of ignition switch 1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Adjust the steering column to its limit position. 3. Disengage the connection between steering column upper guard -1and the instrument panel.

196

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4. Disengage the connection between steering column upper guard -1and steering column lower guard-2- and remove the steering column upper guard -1-.

4. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of the steering column lower guard and remove the steering column lower guard. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 1.3 - 1.9 Nm

6. Disconnect the ignition switch connecting plug -Arrow-A. 7. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow B- of the ignition and remove the ignition-1-. Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Connect the diagnostic tester for testing.

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

197

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3 Oil Line Automatic Cut-off System

Control Sharing of information Ignition coil

Right front door lock

Engine control unit

Fuel pump

Right rear door lock

Airbag controller

BCM

Left front door lock

Left rear door lock

Collision sensor

When the airbag controller detects crash after the vehicle happens to a crash, it feeds back a crash signal to the body controller as long as the force of crash arrives at the critical point of airbag explosion and then the body controller sends the crash signal fed from the airbag controller to the engine control unit in a way of gateway route that cuts off working circuit of the fuel pump. Tips The body controller unlocks all door locks when it receives the crash signal fed from the airbag controller at the time of crash. Thus it provides considerate safety and protection for both driver and passengers.

198

Repair Group 68

- Anti-theft Security System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

69 Audio Visual System 1 Brief introduction 1.1 General descriptions The audio visual system is powered by the battery through the ignition, which may be started when the ignition is ON or ACC. When DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna receives FM or AM broadcasting, it sends to the audio system for processing and later the speakers produce the sound. The audio system is made up of the following parts: 

DA machine/AUDIO machine



Two tweeters



Two front door full-range speakers



Two rear door full-range speakers



DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna



Multi-functional screen

1.2 Precautions Radio wave band Radio wave

AM

FM

Method of modulation

Amplitude modulation

Frequency modulation

Wave band

AM1,AM2

FM1, FM2,FM3

Frequency range

531～1602KHZ

87.5～108.0MHZ

2 Technical parameters Tightening torque Name

Torque

Specification

Grade

Fixing screw of DA machine/AUDIO machine

—

—

3.8～4.4

—

Fixing screw of the door speakers

—

—

1.6～1.9

—

M6×1.0×12

—

8～10

Antenna Amplifier Fixing Bolt

Nm

Tools

8mm Hexagon Sleeve

3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting 3.1 The radio has no sound output in working No.

Inspection steps

0

Preliminary Inspection

Check results Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

199

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

No.

Inspection steps Check whether the radio fuse is blown

1

Check results Proceed to Step 1.

Check the radio connector

Normal

Check whether the radio connector is loose or the

Proceed to Step 2.

Normal

voltage Check whether supply

Proceed to Step 3.

damaged 4

loose or the terminal

There's a fault

radio circuit short or open

Check the radio Check whether the radio is

Operation methods

The supply voltage for

is normal 3

There's a fault

Operation methods Repair the power supply circuit

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 4.

The radio damaged

Replace the radio

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

Check the operation After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether

Repair the connector

corroded

Check the line supply

voltage for the radio circuit

Replace the fuse

The radio connector

terminal is corroded 2

Fuse blown

the fault is still there.

Find the cause from other symptoms

3.2 The radio is not working No.

Inspection steps

0

Preliminary Inspection Check whether the radio fuse is damaged

1

Check results Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 1.

Fuse blown

Replace the fuse

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Check the line supply voltage Check whether supply voltage for the radio circuit

The supply voltage for Proceed to Step 2.

is normal 2

damaged 3

open

Check the radio Check whether the radio is

radio circuit short or

Normal

There's a fault

Proceed to Step 3.

The radio damaged

Normal

There's a fault

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

Check the operation After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether the fault is still there.

Repair the power supply circuit Operation methods Replace the radio and test Operation methods Find the cause from other symptoms

3.3 Station signals can't be received No.

Inspection steps

0

Preliminary Inspection

Check results Normal

Check whether the radio antenna connector has

Proceed to Step 1.

good connection 1

200

Check the radio antenna

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

No connection or

Reconnect the radio

contact poor

antenna connector

There's a fault

Operation methods

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

No.

Inspection steps

Check results

Check whether the radio antenna conductive

Radio antenna open

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

normally 2

Check the radio antenna amplifier Check whether the radio antenna amplifier is Check the radio Check whether the radio is damaged

4

Check the operation

Radio antenna

Replace the shark fin antenna

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 4.

The radio damaged

Normal

There's a fault

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether

antenna

amplifier damaged

Proceed to Step 3.

normal 3

Replace the radio

Proceed to Step 2.

the fault is still there.

Replace the radio and test Operation methods Find the cause from other symptoms

4 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code 4.1 DTC fault code list Fault Code

Definition

U014000

Loss of communication with BCM

U015500

Loss of communication with MIU

U010000

Loss of communication with EMS

U100700

Bus is turned off

U100587

Network management fault

B160009

CAN signal line fault

B111717

The battery voltage is too high

B111716

The battery voltage is too low

U170187

Bluetooth module fault

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

201

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4.2 U014000 Loss of Communication with BCM U015500 Loss of Communication with MIU U010000 Loss of Communication with EMS U100700 Bus Closed U100700 CAN Bus Closed Fault U100587 Network Management Fault B160009 CAN Signal Line Fault DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

U014000

U015500

U010000

Loss of communication with BCM

Loss of communication with MIU

Loss of communication

U100700

with EMS

Bus is turned off

—

lost by 10-time double



Wire fault

period



Control unit fault

lost for 10-time double



Wire fault

period



Control unit fault

lost for 10-time double



Wire fault

period



Control unit fault

twice continuously



Wire fault

After the power mode is



Control unit fault

status for more than 2s



Wire fault

After the power mode is



Control unit fault

or open



Wire fault

After the power mode is



Control unit fault

Power mode is RUN for 5s



ICM message (0x620) is



Power mode is RUN for 5s



EMS message (0x3A0) is

—

—

BCM message (0x4A0) is



—



Power mode is RUN for 5s



CAN Busoff is entered



Possible causes

ACC or RUN for 5s  U100587

Network management fault

—



NM is under limphome

ACC or RUN for 5s  B160009

CAN signal line fault

—



CAN_H or CAN_L short

ACC or RUN for 5s Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect audio control unit connectors T20e, T8c and T8d, check audio control unit connectors T20e, T8c and T8d for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.

202

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

−

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Check whether the fuses FB28 (10A) and FB48 (7.5A) in the instrument panel electrical box are blown. −

Yes - Replace the fuse.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. With the ignition under ACC status, check whether the voltage between pin T8c/5 of the audio control unit connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

4. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the voltage between pin T8c/7 of the audio control unit connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 5.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

203

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether the wire between pin T8c/8 of the audio control unit connector and the body grounding is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 6.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

6. Disconnect body controller connector T40b and check whether the wires between pins T40b/36 and T40b/37 of the body controller connector and pins T20e/10 and T20e/9 of the audio control unit connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

204

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7. Disconnect instrument cluster connector T32a and check whether wires between pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the instrument cluster connector and pins T20e/10,T20e/9 of the audio control unit connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Disconnect the engine control unit connector T112 and check whether wires between pins T112/17 and T112/1 of the engine control unit connector and pins T40a/9 and T40a/8 of

the body controller

connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 9.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

205

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

9. Check whether wires between pins T16j/11 and T16j/3 of the OBD diagnostic interface connector and T20e/10 and T20e/9 of the audio control unit connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 10.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

10. Replace the audio controller and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 11.

−

No-Replace the audio control unit.

11. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

4.3 U170187 Bluetooth Communication Fault DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions

Possible causes 

U170187

Bluetooth communication fault



Module connection fault



Power

supply

supplies

power with normal voltage

—

Bluetooth

module

may

be

faulty 

The

connection

between

(9V-16V) 

The

Bluetooth

After the power mode is

the module

and micro control

ACC or RUN for 5s

unit may be faulty 

Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Replace the audio controller and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the audio control unit.

206

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4.4 B111717 Battery Overvoltage B111716 Battery Undervoltage DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

B111717

The battery voltage is too high

—



Possible causes

Battery voltage is > 16V for 500ms



Wire fault

After the power mode is



Control unit fault

500ms



Wire fault

After the power mode is



Control unit fault

ACC or RUN for 5s  B111716

The battery voltage is too low

—



Battery voltage is < 9V for

ACC or RUN for 5s Diagnostic steps: Diagnostic steps: Check whether the battery charging circuit is normal and check whether the terminal is loose or corrosive. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire and tighten or clean the terminal.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Check whether the fuses FB28 (10A) and FB48 (7.5A) in the instrument panel electrical box are blown. −

Yes - Replace the fuse.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. Check whether the battery voltage is within the normal range. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No-Overhaul or replace the battery.

4. Disconnect audio control unit connectors T20e, T8c and T8d, check audio control unit connectors T20e, T8c and T8d for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

207

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. With the ignition under ACC status, check whether the voltage between pin T8c/5 of the audio control unit connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 6.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

6. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the voltage between pin T8c/7 of the audio control unit connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

208

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7. Check whether the wire between pin T8c/8 of the audio control unit connector and the body grounding is conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Replace the audio controller and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 9.

−

No-Replace the audio control unit.

9. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

209

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5 Overview of Audio Visual System

1 - DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna

2 - Multi-functional display





The radio antenna on the rear windscreen is integrated

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 220

with the rear windscreen 3 - DA machine/AUDIO machine

4 - Multi-functional switch of the steering wheel (left)





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 210

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 220

5 - Multi-functional switch of the steering wheel (right)

6 - Front door full-range speakers





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 220

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 213

7 - Rear door full-range speakers

8 - Tweeters





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 214

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 213

6 Removal and installation of the DA machine/AUDIO machine Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

210

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Plastic skid plate

Removal 1. Remove trim panels -1- and -2- at both sides of DA machine/AUDIO machine.

2. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of DA machine/AUDIO machine and pull out DA machine/AUDIO machine -1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 3.8 - 4.4 Nm Tips Extract the DA machine/AUDIO machine assembly carefully until the connecting plug of DA machine/AUDIO machine can be removed.

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

211

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Disconnect connector -Arrow- of the hazard warning light switch. 4. Disconnect connectors -2- to -7- and remove DA machine/AUDIO machine -1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Set the ignition ON (not necessarily to start the engine) after replacement of DA machine/AUDIO machine and configure DA machine/AUDIO machine according to hints of the diagnostic tester. Connect the diagnostic tester for testing.

7 USB/HDMI Interface 7.1 Overview of USB interface and HDMI interface USB interface/HDMI interface Support play of files in the formats of MP3, WMA, WMV, AVI and MPEG-4. When the UBS carrying files in any of the above format is inserted, the machine will switch automatically to USB play mode (the priority of file formats is: video/audio/photo) and the screen will display USB status, including ―Song Name‖, ―Performer‖, ―Album Name‖, ―Playing Schedule‖, etc. Support play of iPod player. You may operate iPod player on the display interface of the multi-functional display. You may directly connect you portable music player to USB interface and HDMI interface on the front panel. When any external sound source is applied, its play is under the control of the external sound source.

7.2 Removal and installation of the HAMI interface The HDMI interface located on the operation panel of DA machine/AUDIO machine cannot be removed.

7.3 Removal and installation of the USB interface The USB interface located on the operation panel of DA machine/AUDIO machine cannot be removed.

212

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

8 Speaker 8.1 Removal and installation of the tweeter Removal Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left tweeter, but may serve as a reference for the right side.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Remove trim panel on the A-pillar => Vehicle body and painting: Repair Group: 84; Interior equipment: Trim part and trim panel; Removal and installation of the trim panel on the A-pillar. 2. Disengage the fixing clip -Arrow- and remove the left tweeter -1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check functions of the speaker after installation.

8.2 Removal and installation of the front door full-range speaker Removal Tips The instruction is only for removal and installation of the left front door full-range speaker, but may serve as a reference for removal and installation of the right front door full-range speaker.

1. Remove the left front door trim panel=>Vehicle body and painting; Repair group:86; Front door; Removal and installation of front door trim panel

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

213

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow A- of the left front door full-range speaker. 3. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow B- of the left front door full-range speaker and remove the left front door full-range speaker-1-. Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 1.6 - 1.9 Nm

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check functions of the door speaker after installation.

8.3 Removal and installation of the rear door full-range speaker Removal Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left rear front door full band speaker, but may serve as a reference for the right side.

1. Remove the left rear door trim panel=>Vehicle body and painting; Repair group:87; Rear door; Removal and installation of rear door trim panel 2. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of the left rear door full-range speaker and remove the left door full-range speaker-1-. Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 1.6 - 1.9 Nm

214

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Disengage connector -Arrow- of the full-range speaker and remove the full-range speaker-1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check functions of the door speaker after installation.

9 Radio Antenna 9.1 Overview of DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna

1 - DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna

2 - Antenna Amplifier

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

215

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment



Check, replace as necessary



Check, replace as necessary

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 217 3 - Antenna cable 1-.

4 - Antenna cable 2-.





Check: replace the antenna assembly together if necessary.

5 - DA machine/AUDIO machine 

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 210

216

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

Check: replace the antenna assembly together if necessary.

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

9.2 Removal and installation of the antenna amplifier Removal 1. Remove back door upper trim panel -1-.

2. Disengage the connection between the antenna amplifier -1- and the rear window antenna from the position -Arrow A-. 3. Pull out and disconnect the connecting plug of the antenna cable -2-, unscrew the bolt -Arrow B- and remove the bolt -Arrow- of antenna amplifier-1- in the size: M6×1.0×12 Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque:8±10 Nm Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check reception function of the radio antenna after installation.

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

217

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

9.3 Overhaul of DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna Brief Introduction: Tips  Antenna of DA machine/AUDIO machine is irreparable. The damaged antenna cable of DA machine/AUDIO machine must be replaced with the antenna cable of DA machine/AUDIO machine provided as original part only. 

This maintenance solution can also be employed as a solution for inspection or installation of equipment.

Use a new antenna cable of DA machine/AUDIO machine to replace the damaged antenna cable of DA machine/AUDIO machine: 1. Disengage connector of the damaged DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna cable from the equipment. 2. Find the route of damaged DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna cable on the vehicle, and take out the antenna cable of DA machine/AUDIO machine. 3. Install the new antenna cable of DA machine/AUDIO machine along layout of the original antenna. 4. Perform function tests. Tips The antenna cable of DA machine/AUDIO machine should not be buckled or bent excessively! Bending radius should be at least 50mm.

218

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

10 Steering Wheel 10.1 Functions of multi-functional steering wheel buttons

1. Channel search up/last music function button 2. Volume increase button 3. Channel search down/next music function button 4. ON / OFF‖: cruise master switch that controls ON/OFF of cruise function. The cruise indicator in the instrument lights up indicates it is ON; The cruise indicator in the instrument goes out indicates it is OFF. 5. ―RES ACCEL‖: to accelerate or restore cruise function The precondition is that the master switch must be ―ON‖ and the speed is the last memory speed 6. ―CANCEL‖: to release cruise But the vehicle speed will be memorized; if the main switch is pressed to the position ―OFF‖, the memorized vehicle speed will be cleared, and a new speed has to be set next time). 7. SET COAST‖: to speed down or set the current speed as the cruise speed The precondition is that the master switch is ON‖ 8. Volume Down button.

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

219

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

10.2 Removal and installation of the multi-functional steering wheel buttons Removal

1. Remove driver airbag => Refer to page 291. 2. Disengage connector -Arrow A- of multi-functional steering wheel buttons. 3. Disengage trim panel -1- of the multi-functional steering wheel from the position of -Arrow B- and remove the trim panel of the multi-functional steering wheel.

4. Unscrew the screw -Arrow- and remove the multi-functional buttons -1- and -2-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 1 - 2 Nm

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check functions of the steering wheel multi-functional switch after installation.

11. Removal and installation of the multi-functional display Removal

1. Disconnect battery negative cable => Refer to page 7.

220

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Remove trim panel -1- of the multi-functional display from the position of -Arrow-.

3. Unscrew the screw -Arrow- and pull out the multi-functional display -1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2.5 - 3.5 Nm 4. Disengage the connecting plug of the multi-functional display and remove the multi-functional display.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check functions of the display after installation.

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System

221

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

70 AVN Navigation System 1 Brief introduction The vehicle has employed an autonomous navigation system based on GPS that is more reliable than ordinary ones, by which a more accurate positioning can be achieved via satellite wave positioning (GPS navigation).This ensures that the driver knows their current location and direction of travel, thus allowing the driver to drive at ease and in comfort. Global positioning system is used, with full-color digital map displayed clearly on 8-Inch

large screen, by which the

vehicle location can be positioned accurately.It also employs AMAP to guide the driver to search and select the best driving route to destination. Simple, clear and complete Chinese menu enables the driver to carry out a Quick Search with multiple methods, including facility category, address, zip code and map, etc. One particular satisfying feature is that real voice prompts are provided by the navigation system. After settings have been completed, the navigation system will guide the driver to a direction with clear voice prompts, allowing one to easily and happily reach new destinations. No matter how long the road is, happiness will be always with you. General Instructions GPS positioning of AVN navigation system is under the effect of weather and application site (tall building/tunnel/underground/forest). Moreover, most GPS cannot position indoor and in basement and GPS signal cannot penetrate through high-rise buildings and automotive heat-insulating film with metal components or similar product. Therefore, the navigation electronic map data provided by AVN navigation system is for common consulting and reference only. Voice prompts and intersection information are the suggestions obtained on the basis of the optimal route in electronic map database that is for reference of the driver only. The driver must always obey local traffic rules. Extremely high or extremely low temperature will interfere normal functions. If the vehicle parks for a long time under direct solar radiation or in any cold area while its engine is shut down, the vehicle could become extremely hot or extremely cold and the entertainment and navigation system may function abnormally under the environment. Normal functions are recovered once the interior temperature returns to the normal scope. The navigation control system of the vehicle is mainly composed of the following components: 

AVN navigation reception unit



7-inch color display with touch screen



GPS antenna



USB play interface/HAMI interface



Multifunction steering wheel

2 Technical parameters Tightening torque Name

Torque

Specification

Grade

Fixing screw of AVN navigation

—

—

3.8～4.4

—

GPS antenna fixation screw

—

—

3.8～4.4

—

222

Repair Group 70 - AVN Navigation System

Nm

Tools

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting 3.1 Navigation voice cannot be heard No.

Inspection steps

0

Preliminary Inspection

Check results Normal

Check whether the volume of navigation voice is

Volume of navigation Proceed to Step 1.

adjusted to a suitable level 1

Check navigation connector

loose or the terminal is

Normal

There's a fault

Proceed to Step 2.

connector loose or the

Inspect the speaker Check whether the speaker is faulty

3

Check the operation

Adjust to a suitable level Operation methods

Repair the connector

terminal corroded Normal

There's a fault

Proceed to Step 3.

Speaker fault

Normal

There's a fault

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether

Operation methods

The navigation

corroded 2

voice not adjusted to a suitable level

Check whether the navigation connector is

There's a fault

the fault is still there.

Operation methods Repair the harness or replace the speaker Operation methods Find the cause from other symptoms

3.2 GPS mark no display No.

Inspection steps

0

Preliminary Inspection Check whether there are obstacles around

1

Check the GPS

Check results Normal

There's a fault

Proceed to Step 1.

Obstacles around

Normal

There's a fault

Check whether there are objects on top of the GPS

Proceed to Step 2.

antenna 2

Check the radio device

Objects on top of the GPS antenna

Normal

There's a fault

Proceed to Step 3.

Radio receiver installed

Normal

There's a fault

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

Operation methods Drive the vehicle to a place without obstacles Operation methods Remove the objects Operation methods

Check whether the radio receiver is installed (e.g.anti-theft device and

Remove or change its position

radar, etc.) 3

Check the operation After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether the fault is still there.

Operation methods Find the cause from other symptoms

Repair Group 70 - AVN Navigation System

223

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4 Overview of AVN Navigation System

1 - AVN navigation radio antenna

2 - Multi-functional display



Used for the radio





The radio antenna located on the rear windscreen is

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 220

integrated with the rear windscreen 3 - GPS navigation antenna

4 - AVN navigation



Used for navigation system





Located under the central part of the instrument panel => Refer to page 226

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 225

5 - Multi-functional switch of the steering wheel (left)

6 - Multi-functional switch of the steering wheel (right)





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 220

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 220

7 - Front door full-range speakers

8 - Rear door full-range speakers





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 213

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 214

9 - Tweeters

9 - Tweeters



Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 213



224

Repair Group 70 - AVN Navigation System

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 213

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5 Removal and installation of the AVN navigation Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

Plastic skid plate

Removal 1. Remove trim panels -1- and -2- at both sides of AVN navigation.

2. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of AVN navigation and pull out AVN navigation -1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 3.8 - 4.4 Nm Tips Extract AVN navigation carefully until the connecting plug of the AVN navigation can be removed.

Repair Group 70 - AVN Navigation System

225

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Disconnect connector -Arrow- of the hazard warning light switch. 4. Disconnect the connecting plugs -2-~-8- and remove AVN navigation -1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Set the ignition ON (not necessarily to start the engine) after replacement of AVN navigation and configure AVN navigation according to hints of the diagnostic tester. Connect the diagnostic tester for testing.

6 DVD Navigation Antenna 6.1 Removal and installation of GPS antenna assembly GPS antenna is located under the central part of the instrument panel component that can be replaced only after removal of the instrument panel component.

1. Remove instrument panel component => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 82; Instrument panel; Removal and installation of the instrument panel component 2. Disengage fixing clip -Arrow- of GPS antenna -1- from the instrument panel component.

226

Repair Group 70 - AVN Navigation System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Unscrew the screw -Arrow- and remove the GPS antenna-1-. Tightening torque：3.8～4.4 Nm

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check reception function of the antenna after installation.

Repair Group 70 - AVN Navigation System

227

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

72 Protection System 1 Brief introduction Protection device can improve the passive protection for passengers in the vehicle during a severe crash. This device is usually based on the existing standard protection system (seat belt). The airbag controller is connected with the body control module and the vehicle diagnostic connector through low speed CAN bus. The airbag controller determines frontal or side crash through crash sensors so as to control the operation of the protection device. The airbag controller is installed on the central channel under the instrument panel. The airbag controller monitors the condition of the vehicle crash by crash sensors. The controller can identify whether the crash is severe or slight, or whether the impact is caused by uneven road surface according to the input data, as as to ensure the effective operation of the airbag. If the monitored severity of the frontal impact exceeds the preset value, the airbag controller will send signals to trigger the front airbag module and the seat belt pre-tensioner. If side airbags are installed, two side impact sensors are needed to monitor the side crash. If the monitored severity of the side impact exceeds the preset value, the airbag controller will send signals to trigger the corresponding side airbag module. If side air curtains are installed, two side impact sensors are needed to monitor the side crash. If the monitored severity of the side impact exceeds the preset value, the airbag controller will send signals to trigger the corresponding side air curtain module. The seat belt is the most important safety device. If used correctly, it can reduce severe injuries or deaths in various types of crashes. The front seat belt retractor is installed in the cavity at the bottom of B-pillar lower trim panel.Extending from the retractor, the webbing is fixed to the mounting point on the B-pillar lower body via a manual height adjuster on the B-pillar upper area. The height adjuster is fixed on the B-pillar by bolts. The seat belt is mounted to the height adjuster through a D-ring.With the height adjuster sliding up and down, the seat belt is fixed in the best position under different circumstances. The seat belt buckle assembly is installed on the bracket of the seat frame inner side. The rear seat belt retractor is fixed on the part of body in white behind the rear seat armrest with bolts. The other end of the webbing is fixed to the seat lower panel. The left seat belt buckle assembly is installed on the rear floor. The right seat belt buckle assembly and the middle seat belt buckle are integrated as an assembly. The rear central seat belt retractor is fixed inside the rear seat with bolts. The other end of the webbing is fixed to the seat lower panel. Danger 

The seat belt consists of belt retractor, belt buckle, height adjuster and accessories (if any), which should be examined after each crash.



The removal and installation of airbags and seat belts must be conducted by professional technicians.Consult the relevant documents before operation.



The newly installed seat belt must be examined by a professional technician to ensure of normal functioning without any defect, otherwise it may cause personal injuries.

System Operating Principle

228

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Working principle of passenger restraint system in frontal crash: 1. The crash sensors detect crash signal in case of a crash; 2. The crash sensors transmit the crash signal to ECU; 3. The seat belt functions; 4. ECU judges the crash signal; 5. ECU sends ignition signal to pre-tensioner seat belt and the pre-tensioner seat belt starts to work (if the pre-tensioner seat belt is installed); 6. ECU sends ignition signal to the airbag and the airbag starts to work and protect the driver or the passenger. Protection device components: 

Airbag controller



Driver airbag



Front passenger airbag



Side airbag (if installed)



Side air curtain (if installed)



Front Seat Belt Assembly



Rear/middle seat belt assembly



Side crash sensor (if installed)



Front and rear seat belt buckle



Clock spring



Airbag fault warning light



Seat belt reminder warning light

2 Technical parameters Tightening torque Name Fixing bolt of upper fixing point of the front seat belt assembly Fixing bolt of lower fixing point of the front seat belt assembly Fixing bolt component of front seat belt retractor Fixing bolt component of height adjuster Fixing bolt component of upper fixing point of the rear seat belt Upper fixing bolt component of the rear seat belt retractor Fixing bolt component of the rear double buckle assembly Fixing bolt component of the rear single buckle assembly Fixing nut of airbag controller Fixing bolt of the front passenger airbag Fixing screw component of the side air curtain Side collision sensor retaining bolts Fixing bolt of front buckle

Specification

Grade

Torque Nm

Tools

M10×1.25×20

8.8

40～50

17mm Hexagon Sleeve

M10×1.25×40

8.8

40～50

17mm Hexagon Sleeve

M10×1.25×40 M10×1.25×20

8.8 8.8

40～50 40～50

17mm Hexagon Sleeve 17mm Hexagon Sleeve

M10×1.25×30

8.8

40～50

17mm Hexagon Sleeve

M10×1.25×80

8.8

40～50

17mm Hexagon Sleeve

M10×1.25×30

8.8

40～50

17mm Hexagon Sleeve

M10×1.25×30

8.8

40～50

17mm Hexagon Sleeve

M6×1.0×12 M8×1.25×16 — M6×1.0×30 M10×1.25×20

8.8 8.8 — 8 8.8

8～10 11～13 8～10 9～11 40～50

10mm Hexagon Sleeve 10mm Hexagon Sleeve — 10mm Hexagon Sleeve 17mm Hexagon Sleeve

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

229

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code 3.1 DTC fault code list Fault Code

230

Definition

B100049

ECU internal fault

B100155

ECU configuration error

B10024A

Incorrect installation or initialization fault of driver peripheral sensor

B100264

Reliability fault of driver peripheral acceleration sensor

B100296

Driver peripheral acceleration sensor damaged

B100286

Communication fault of driver peripheral sensor

B10081C

Driver peripheral acceleration sensor bonding

B100811

Driver peripheral acceleration sensor short to ground

B100812

Driver peripheral acceleration sensor short to power supply

B10034A

Incorrect installation or initialization fault of passenger peripheral sensor

B100364

Reliability fault of passenger peripheral acceleration sensor

B100386

Communication fault of passenger peripheral sensor

B100396

Passenger peripheral acceleration sensor damaged

B10091C

Passenger peripheral acceleration sensor bonding

B100911

Passenger peripheral acceleration sensor short to ground

B100912

Passenger peripheral acceleration sensor short to power supply

B10101C

Driver airbag bonding

B101011

Driver airbag is short to ground.

B101012

Driver airbag short to power supply

B10101B

Driver airbag resistance is too low

B10101A

Driver airbag resistance is too low

B10111C

Passenger airbag grounding

B101111

Passenger airbag is short to ground.

B101112

Passenger airbag is short to power supply

B10111B

Passenger airbag resistance is too low

B10111A

Passenger airbag resistance is too low

B10121C

Driver seat belt pre-tensioner bonding

B101211

Driver's seat belt pretensioner is short to ground.

B101212

Driver's seat belt pretensioner is short to power supply

B10121B

Driver's seat belt pretensioner resistance is too high

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Fault Code

Definition

B10121A

Driver's seat belt pretensioner resistance is too low.

B10131C

Passenger seat belt pre-tensioner bonding

B101311

Passenger’s seat belt pretensioner is short to ground

B101312

Passenger seat belt pre-tensioner short to power supply

B10131B

Passenger's seat belt pretensioner resistance is too high.

B10131A

Passenger's seat belt pretensioner resistance is too low.

B10141C

Driver side airbag bonding

B101411

Driver's side airbag is short to ground.

B101412

Driver's side airbag is short to power supply.

B10141B

Driver's side airbag resistance is too high.

B10141A

Driver's side airbag resistance is too low.

B10151C

Passenger side airbag bonding

B101511

Passenger’s side airbag is short to ground.

B101512

Passenger’s side airbag is short to power supply.

B10151B

Passenger’s side airbag resistance is too high.

B10151A

Passenger’s side airbag resistance is too low.

B10161C

Passenger air curtain bonding

B101611

Passenger air curtain short to ground

B101612

Passenger air curtain is short to power supply

B10161B

Passenger air curtain resistance too high

B10161A

Passenger air curtain resistance is too low

B10171C

Driver air curtain bonding

B101711

Driver air curtain short to ground

B101712

Driver air curtain is short to power supply

B10171B

Driver air curtain resistance too high

B10171A

Driver air curtain resistance is too low

B10201C

Driver seat belt buckle bonding

B102012

Driver seat belt buckle short to power supply

B10211C

Passenger seat belt buckle bonding

B102112

Passenger seat belt buckle short to power supply

B102312

Passenger seat cushion buckle short to power supply

B103414

Output short to ground or resistance too high

B103412

Crash output short to power supply for more than 6ms

U300317

Too high voltage of power

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

231

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Fault Code

232

Definition

U300316

Too low voltage of power

B105000

Exploded in frontal crash

B105100

Exploded in side crash

B105200

Crash counter maximizes

U010000

Loss of communication with EMS

U015500

Loss of communication with the instrument

U015100

Airbag offline

U100500

Airbag warning light error

U100400

Vehicle speed information invalid

U007300

CAN bus fault

U300316

Too low voltage of power

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3.2 B100049 ECU Internal Fault B100155 ECU Configuration Error U007300 CAN Bus Fault DTC

DTC Definition

DTC trigger

DTC testing conditions 

Possible causes

conditions

Important circuit parts will be checked, including: watchdog, ER capacity,

B100049

ECU internal fault

—

SPI, ADC, sensor, fireproof circuit, RAM,



Wire fault



Control unit fault



Wire fault



External

ROM, voltage stabilizer, etc. ECU B100155

configuration



—

2ms after the fault

configuration error

error  U007300

CAN bus fault

The fault is reported when the controller fails to send message and the error counter counts to 256



The

option



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Control unit fault

message

cannot be sent in

two

continuous bus off status

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect the airbag controller connector T32b and check the connector T32b for crack and abnormality, and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

233

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires between pins T32b/2 and T32b/17 of the airbag controller connector and pins T16j/11 and T16j/3 of the OBD diagnostic interface are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 4.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

4. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.3 B10024A Incorrect Installation or Initialization Fault of Driver Peripheral Sensor B100264 Reliability Fault of Driver Peripheral Acceleration Sensor B100296 Driver Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Damaged B100286 Communication Fault of Driver Peripheral Acceleration Sensor B10081C Driver Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Bonding B100811 Driver Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Short to Ground B100812 Driver Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Short to Power Supply DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing conditions

DTC trigger 

Wire fault



Incorrect PAS type

driver peripheral sensor



Control unit fault

Reliability fault of



Wire fault



PAS reliability fault



Control unit fault

Incorrect installation or B10024A

initialization fault of

B100264

driver peripheral acceleration sensor

234

Possible causes

conditions

Repair Group 72

- Protection System





40ms after the fault

1000ms after the fault

—

—

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

DTC

DTC Definition Driver peripheral

B100296

acceleration sensor

DTC testing conditions 

B100286

of driver peripheral

after

the

fault

damaged Communication fault

120ms



150ms

after

the

fault

sensor

DTC trigger

Possible causes

conditions —

—



Wire fault



PAS defectiveness



Control unit fault



Wire fault



PAS communication error



Control unit fault



Driver side PAS line connected

Driver peripheral B10081C

acceleration sensor

to

passenger side PAS 

40ms after the fault

—

line 

bonding

Driver side crash sensor fault



Control unit fault



PAS line short to

Driver peripheral B100811

acceleration sensor

ground 

40ms after the fault

—



short to ground

sensor fault 

Control unit fault



PAS line short to

Driver peripheral B100812

acceleration sensor

Driver side crash

positive terminal 

40ms after the fault

—



short to power supply

Driver side crash sensor fault



Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and driver side crash sensor connector T2f, check airbag controller connector T32b and driver side crash sensor connector T2f for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

235

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires between pins T32b/18 and T32b/19 of the airbag controller connector and pins T2f/1 and T2f/2 of the driver side crash sensor connector are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. Disconnect battery negative cable. 4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

236

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to ground. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

7. Replace the driver side crash sensor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No-Replace the driver side crash sensor.

8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.4 B10034A Incorrect Installation or Initialization Fault of Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor B100364 Reliability Fault of Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor B100386 Communication Fault of Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor B100396 Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Damaged B10091C Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Bonding B100911 Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Short to Ground B100912 Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Short to Power Supply DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing conditions

DTC trigger

Incorrect installation or B10034A

initialization fault of passenger peripheral



40ms after the fault

Possible causes

conditions

—

sensor

Repair Group 72



Wire fault



PAS type incorrect



Control unit fault

- Protection System

237

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

DTC

DTC Definition Reliability fault of

B100364

passenger peripheral

DTC testing conditions 

fault

acceleration sensor Communication fault B100386

of passenger peripheral



B100396

acceleration sensor

150ms after the fault

sensor Passenger peripheral

1000ms after the



120ms after the fault

damaged

DTC trigger

Possible causes

conditions —

—

—



Wire fault



PAS credibility fault



Control unit fault



Wire fault



PAS communication error



Control unit fault



Wire fault



PAS defectiveness



Control unit fault



Passenger side PAS

Passenger peripheral B10091C

acceleration sensor

line connected to 

40ms after the fault

—

bonding

Passenger peripheral B100911

acceleration sensor short to ground



40ms after the fault

—

driver side PAS line 

Sensor Fault



Control unit fault



PAS line short to ground



Sensor Fault



Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and right crash sensor connector T2k, check airbag controller connector T32b and right crash sensor connector T2k for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

238

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires between pins T32b/27 and T32b/28 of the airbag controller connector and pins T2k/1 and T2k/2 of the right crash sensor connector are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. Disconnect battery negative cable. 4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

239

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to ground. Yes-Repair the faulty wire. No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

7. Replace the right crash sensor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No-Replace the right crash sensor.

8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.5 B10101C Driver Airbag Bonding B101011 Driver Airbag Short to Ground B101012 Driver Airbag Short to Power Supply B10101B Driver Airbag Resistance too High B10101A Driver Airbag Resistance too Low DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing conditions

DTC trigger

Possible causes

conditions 

 B10101C

Driver airbag bonding

circuit is connected

Connected to other circuit in initialization for more than 6ms

to —

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

line

of

other

ignition circuit 

Driver

Airbag

Malfunction 

240

Driver side airbag

Control unit fault

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing conditions

DTC trigger

Possible causes

conditions 

B101011

B101012

B10101B

B10101A

Driver airbag is short



to ground.

Driver airbag short to

fault



power supply

Driver airbag

resistance is too low

1500ms after the fault



ground —

—

Airbag



Control unit fault



Airbag line short to



Driver

Airbag

Malfunction

—

1500ms after the resistance is lower

Driver

positive terminal

than 5.5Ω 



Malfunction

1500ms after the resistance is higher

resistance is too low

Driver airbag

1500ms after the

Airbag line short to

—

than 1.1Ω



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Airbag

resistance

too high 

Control unit fault



Wire fault



Airbag

resistance

too low 

Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and driver airbag connector T2ae, check airbag controller connector T32b and driver airbag connector T2ae for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires between pins T32b/3 and T32b/4 of the airbag controller connector and pins T2ae/1 and T2ae/2 of the driver airbag connector are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

241

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Disconnect battery negative cable. 4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to ground. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

7. Replace the driver airbag, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No Replace driver airbag.

8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes, find out the reasons from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

242

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3.6 B10111C Passenger Airbag Bonding B101111 Passenger Airbag Short to Ground B101112 Passenger Airbag Short to Power Supply B10111B Passenger Airbag Resistance too High B10111A Passenger Airbag Resistance too Low DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing conditions

DTC trigger

Possible causes

conditions 

 B10111C

Passenger airbag grounding

side airbag line is

Connected to other circuit in initialization for

connected to line of —

B101112

B10111B

B10111A

Passenger airbag is



short to ground.

Passenger airbag is

fault



short to power supply

Passenger airbag

Passenger airbag

1500ms after the fault





Control unit fault



Airbag line short to



Passenger

airbag

fault 

Control unit fault



Airbag line short to positive terminal

—



Passenger

airbag

fault

—

1500ms after the resistance is lower

airbag

ground —

than 5.5Ω 

Passenger fault

1500ms after the resistance is higher

resistance is too low

resistance is too low

1500ms after the

other circuit 

more than 6ms

B101111

The front passenger

—

than 1.1Ω



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Airbag

resistance

too high 

Control unit fault



Wire fault



Airbag

resistance

too low 

Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and passenger airbag connector T2av, check airbag controller connector T32b and passenger airbag connector T2av for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

243

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires between pins T32b/5 and T32b/6 of the airbag controller connector and pins T2av/1 and T2av/2 of the passenger airbag connector are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. Disconnect battery negative cable. 4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

244

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to ground. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

7. Replace the passenger airbag, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No

Replace the front passenger airbag.

8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.7 B10121C Driver Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Bonding B101211 Driver Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Short to Ground B101212 Driver Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Short to Power Supply B10121B Driver Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Resistance too High B10121A Driver Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Resistance too Low DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing conditions

DTC trigger

Possible causes

conditions 

B10121C

Driver seat belt pre-tensioner bonding



Connected

to

is connected to line

other

circuit in initialization

BT1FD circuit line

—

for more than 6ms

of other circuit 

Driver

seat

belt

pre-tensioner fault 

Repair Group 72

Control unit fault

- Protection System

245

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

DTC

DTC Definition

B101211

Driver's seat belt pretensioner is short to ground.

DTC testing conditions

DTC trigger conditions

Possible causes 



1500ms after the fault

—

  

B101212

B10121B

B10121A

Driver's seat belt pretensioner is short to power supply



Driver's seat belt pretensioner resistance is too high



Driver's seat belt pretensioner resistance is too low.



1500ms after the fault

—

1500ms after the resistance is higher than 5.5Ω

—

1500ms after the resistance is lower than 1.1Ω

—

       

Seat belt pre-tensioner line short to ground Driver seat belt pre-tensioner fault Control unit fault Seat belt pre-tensioner line short to positive terminal Driver seat belt pre-tensioner fault Control unit fault Wire fault Seat belt pre-tensioner resistance too high Control unit fault Wire fault Seat belt pre-tensioner resistance too low Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and driver seat belt pre-tensioner connector T2g, check airbag controller connector T32b and driver seat belt pre-tensioner connector T2g for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires between pins T32b/7 and T32b/8 of the airbag controller connector and pins T2g/1 and T2g/2 of the driver seat belt pre-tensioner connector are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

246

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Disconnect battery negative cable. 4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to ground. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

7. Replace the driver seat belt pre-tensioner, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No Replace driver seal belt pre-tensioner

8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

247

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3.8 B10131C Passenger Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Bonding

B101311 Passenger Seat Belt

Pre-tensioner Short to Ground B101312 Passenger Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Short to Power Supply B10131B Passenger Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Resistance too High B10131A Passenger Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Resistance too Low DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing conditions

DTC trigger

Possible causes

conditions 

Ignition circuit line is

Passenger seat belt

B10131C



Connected

to

other

circuit in initialization

pre-tensioner bonding

connected

to

other ignition circuit —

line 

for more than 6ms

Passenger's seat belt pretensioner fault



Control unit fault



Seat

belt

pre-tensioner

line

Passenger’s seat belt B101311

pretensioner is short to



1500ms after the fault

—

ground

short to ground 

pretensioner fault 

Control unit fault



Seat

belt

pre-tensioner

line

Passenger seat belt B101312

pre-tensioner short to

Passenger's seat belt

short 

1500ms after the fault

— 

power supply

to

positive

terminal Passenger's seat belt pretensioner fault

Passenger's seat belt B10131B

1500ms

pretensioner resistance

resistance

is too high.

than 5.5Ω

Passenger's seat belt B10131A



pretensioner resistance is too low.



1500ms

after is

the higher



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Seat

—

belt

pre-tensioner resistance too high

after

the

resistance is lower than



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Seat

—

belt

pre-tensioner

1.1Ω

resistance too low 

Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and front passenger seat belt pre-tensioner connector T2j, check airbag controller connector T32b and front passenger seat belt pre-tensioner connector T2j for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

248

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires between pins T32b/10 and T32b/9 of the airbag controller connector and pins T2j/1 and T2j/2 of the front passenger seat belt pre-tensioner connector are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. Disconnect battery negative cable. 4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

249

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to ground. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

7. Replace the front passenger seat belt pre-tensioner, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No-Replace the front passenger seat belt pre-tensioner.

8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.9 B10141C Driver Side Airbag Bonding B101411 Driver Side Airbag Short to Ground B101412 Driver Side Airbag Short to Power Supply B10141B Driver Side Airbag Resistance too High B10141A Driver Side Airbag Resistance too Low DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing conditions

DTC trigger

Possible causes

conditions 

Ignition circuit line is

B10141C

Driver side airbag bonding



Connected to other circuit in initialization for more than 6ms

connected

to

other ignition circuit —

line 

Driver’s

Side

Airbag Fault 

250

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

Control unit fault

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing conditions

DTC trigger

Possible causes

conditions 

B101411

B101412

B10141B

B10141A

Driver's side airbag is short to ground.

Driver's side airbag is short to power supply.

Driver's side airbag

ground 

resistance is too low.

1500ms after the fault

—



Driver’s

Side

Airbag Fault 

Control unit fault



Airbag line short to positive terminal



1500ms after the fault

—



Driver’s

Side

Airbag Fault



1500ms after the resistance is higher

resistance is too high.

Driver's side airbag

Airbag line short to

—

than 5.5Ω 

1500ms after the resistance is lower than

—

1.1Ω



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Airbag

resistance

too high 

Control unit fault



Wire fault



Airbag

resistance

too low

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and driver side airbag connector T2d, check airbag controller connector T32b and driver side airbag connector T2d for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires between pins T32b/11 and T32b/12 of the airbag controller connector and pins T2d/1 and T2d/2 of the driver side airbag connector are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

251

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Disconnect battery negative cable. 4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to ground. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

7. Replace the driver side airbag, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No-Replace the driver side airbag.

8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

252

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3.10 B10151C Passenger Side Airbag Bonding B101511 Passenger Side Airbag Short to Ground B101512 Passenger Side Airbag Short to Power Supply B10151B Passenger Side Airbag Resistance too High B10151A Passenger Side Airbag Resistance too Low DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing conditions

DTC trigger

Possible causes

conditions 

Passenger side airbag

B10151C

B101511



bonding

Passenger’s side airbag is short to ground.

is

Connected to other circuit in initialization

—

for more than 6ms

is short to power



B10151A

Passenger’s side airbag

resistance is too low.

Passenger

side



Control unit fault



Airbag line short to ground



1500ms after the fault

—



Passenger

side

airbag fault 

Control unit fault



Airbag line short to positive terminal



1500ms after the fault

—



Passenger

side

airbag fault



1500ms after the resistance is higher

resistance is too high.

Passenger’s side airbag

to

airbag fault

supply.

B10151B

connected

other ignition circuit

Passenger’s side airbag B101512

Ignition circuit line

—

than 5.5Ω 

1500ms after the resistance is lower than

—

1.1Ω



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Airbag

resistance

too high 

Control unit fault



Wire fault



Airbag

resistance

too low 

Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and passenger side airbag connector T2a, check airbag controller connector T32b and passenger side airbag connector T2a for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

253

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires between pins T32b/14 and T32b/13 of the airbag controller connector and pins T2a/1 and T2a/2 of the passenger side airbag connector are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. Disconnect battery negative cable. 4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

254

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to ground. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

7. Replace the passenger side airbag, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No-Replace the passenger side airbag.

8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.11 B10161C Passenger Air Curtain Bonding B101611 Passenger Air Curtain Short to Ground B101612 Passenger Air Curtain Short to Power Supply B10161B Passenger Air Curtain Resistance too High B10161A Passenger Air Curtain Resistance too Low DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing conditions

DTC trigger

Possible causes

conditions 

Curtain circuit

B10161C

Passenger air curtain bonding



Connected to other circuit in initialization

airbag line

is

connected to line of —

other circuit 

for more than 6ms

Passenger

air

curtain fault 

Repair Group 72

Control unit fault

- Protection System

255

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing conditions

DTC trigger

Possible causes

conditions 

Passenger air curtain

B101611

B101612

short to ground

Passenger air curtain is

B10161B

B10161A

short to power supply

Passenger air curtain

ground 

resistance is too low

1500ms after the fault

—



Passenger

air

curtain fault 

Control unit fault



Airbag line short to positive terminal



1500ms after the fault

—



Passenger

air

curtain fault



1500ms after the resistance is higher

resistance too high

Passenger air curtain

Airbag line short to

—

than 5.5Ω 

1500ms after the resistance is lower than 1.1Ω

—



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Airbag

resistance

too high 

Control unit fault



Wire fault



Airbag

resistance

too low 

Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and passenger air curtain connector T2n, check airbag controller connector T32b and passenger air curtain connector T2n for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires between pins T32b/23 and T32b/24 of the airbag controller connector and pins T2n/1 and T2n/2 of the passenger air curtain connector are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

256

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Disconnect battery negative cable. 4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to ground. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

7. Replace the passenger air curtain, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No-Replace the passenger air curtain.

8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

257

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3.12 B10171C Driver Air Curtain Bonding B101711 Driver Air Curtain Short to Ground B101712 Driver Air Curtain Short to Power Supply B10171B Driver Air Curtain Resistance too High B10171A Driver Air Curtain Resistance too Low DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing conditions

DTC trigger

Possible causes

conditions 

Driver side curtain airbag

Driver air curtain

B10171C



Connected to other circuit in initialization

bonding

circuit

is

connected to line of —

other circuit 

for more than 6ms

Driver Air Curtain Malfunction

B101711

Driver air curtain short

B101712

B10171B

B10171A

to ground

Driver air curtain is short to power supply

Driver air curtain

Driver air curtain

Control unit fault



Airbag line short to ground



1500ms after the fault

—



Driver Air Curtain Malfunction



Control unit fault



Airbag line short to positive terminal



1500ms after the fault

—



Driver Air Curtain Malfunction



1500ms after the resistance is higher

resistance too high

resistance is too low



—

than 5.5Ω 

1500ms after the resistance is lower than 1.1Ω

—



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Airbag

resistance

too high 

Control unit fault



Wire fault



Airbag

resistance

too low 

Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and driver air curtain connector T2i, check airbag controller connector T32b and driver air curtain connector T2i for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

258

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires between pins T32b/31 and T32b/32 of the airbag controller connector and pins T2i/1 and T2i/2 of the driver air curtain connector are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. Disconnect battery negative cable. 4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

259

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to ground. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

7. Replace the driver air curtain, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No-Replace the driver air curtain.

8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.13 B10201C Driver Seat Belt Buckle Bonding B102012 Driver Seat Belt Buckle Short to Power Supply DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing conditions

DTC trigger

Possible causes

conditions 

B10201C

B102012

Driver seat belt buckle bonding

Driver seat belt buckle short to power supply

connection 

6ms after the fault

—



260

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

Fault of driver seat belt switch



Control unit fault



Erroneous connection



6ms after the fault

—



Fault of driver seat belt switch

 Diagnostic steps:

Erroneous

Control unit fault

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and driver seat belt switch connector T2e, check airbag controller connector T32b and driver seat belt switch connector T2e for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Disconnect battery negative cable. 3. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 4.

4. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to ground. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 6.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

6. Replace the driver seat belt switch, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No-Replace the driver seat belt switch.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

261

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.14 B10211C Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Bonding B102112 Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Short to Power Supply DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing conditions

DTC trigger

Possible causes

conditions 

Erroneous connection

B10211C

Passenger seat belt buckle bonding



6ms after the fault

—



Fault

of

front

passenger seat belt switch

buckle short to power

Control unit fault



Erroneous connection

Passenger seat belt B102112





6ms after the fault

—



Fault

of

front

passenger seat belt

supply

switch 

Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T24f, front passenger seat belt switch connector T2b and front passenger seat belt sensor connector T2c, check airbag controller connector T24f, front passenger seat belt switch connector T2b and front passenger seat belt sensor connector T2c for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Disconnect battery negative cable. 3. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 4.

262

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to ground. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether the pin T2c/2 of the front passenger seat belt sensor connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

263

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6. Check whether pin T2b/1 and pin T2b/2 of the front passenger seat belt switch connector are short. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

7. Check whether pin T2c/1 and pin T2c/2 of the front passenger seat belt switch connector are short. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 8.

8. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 9.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

9. Replace the front passenger seat belt switch, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 10.

−

No-Replace the front passenger seat belt switch.

10. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

264

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3.15 B103414 Crash Output Short to Ground or Open B103412 Output Short to Power Supply DTC

B103414

B103412

DTC Definition

Crash output short to

DTC testing conditions 

Output short to power supply

—

than 6ms 

Crash output short to power supply for more

Possible causes

conditions

Crash output short to power supply for more

ground or open

DTC trigger

—

than 6ms



Wire fault



Crash output short to ground



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Crash output short to positive terminal



Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b, body controller connector T40b and engine control unit connector T112, check airbag controller connector T32b, body controller connector T40b and engine control unit connector T112 for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Disconnect battery negative cable. 3. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 4.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

265

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to ground. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether the wire between pin T32b/26 of the airbag controller connector and pin T40b/39 of the body controller connector is open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

266

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6. Check whether the wire between pin T32b/26 of the airbag controller connector and pin T112/26 of the engine control unit connector is open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

7. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.16 U300317 power supply voltage is too high, and U300316 power supply voltage is too low. DTC

U300317

DTC Definition

Too high voltage of

DTC testing conditions



power

Voltage is higher than 16V for 1000ms

DTC trigger

Possible causes

conditions

—



Wire fault



Battery Voltage is Too High



Charging overvoltage

U300316

Too low voltage of power



Voltage is lower than 9V for 1000ms

—



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Lower

battery

voltage 

Charging undervoltage



Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Check whether the battery charging circuit is normal, and whether the terminal is loose and corrodes. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire and tighten or clean the terminal.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

267

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Extract the fuse FB42 (10A) out of the instrument panel electrical box and check whether the fuse FB42 (10A) in the instrument panel electrical box is blown. −

Yes-Replace the fuse.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. Check whether the battery voltage is within the normal range. −

Yes Proceed to Step 4.

−

No, repair or replace battery.

4. Check whether the generator power voltage is within normal range. −

Yes Proceed to Step 5.

−

No, repair or replace the generator.

5. Disconnect the airbag controller connector T32b and check the connector T32b for crack and abnormality, and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes, clean the connector and pins.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Disconnect battery negative cable. 7. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 8.

268

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

9. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short to ground. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 10.

10. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.17 B105000 Exploded in Frontal Crash B105100 Exploded in Side Crash DTC

DTC Definition Exploded in frontal

B105000

B105100

crash

Exploded in side crash

DTC testing conditions





DTC trigger

Possible causes

conditions —

After ignition

—

After ignition



Wire fault



Unfolded in crash



Control unit fault



Wire fault



Unfolded in crash



Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Check whether relevant airbag/air curtain is indeed exploded. −

Yes-Replace the damaged part.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 3.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

3. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

269

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

−

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.18 B105200 Crash Counter Maximizes DTC

DTC Definition Crash counter

B105200

maximizes

DTC testing conditions



DTC trigger

Possible causes

conditions —

After crash



Wire fault



Unfolded in crash



Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 2.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

2. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.19 U010000 Loss of Communication with EMS U015500 Loss of Communication with Instrument U100400 Vehicle Speed Information Invalid U100500 Airbag Warning Light Error U015100 Airbag Offline DTC

DTC testing

DTC Definition

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

U010000

Loss of communication

message of the node is

—

with EMS

The minimum period

 U015500

—

with the instrument

The minimum period message of the node is

U100400

Vehicle speed information invalid

The invalid vehicle speed received is over 300ms

270

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

Wire fault



SDM

loses

communication with EMS 

Control unit fault



Wire fault



SDM

loses

communication with

lost for 10 periods, totaling 1000ms.





lost for 15 periods, totaling 300ms.

Loss of communication

Possible causes

ICM 

Control unit fault



Wire fault



SDM

—

loses

communication with other nodes 

Control unit fault

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing conditions 

U100500

―Warning

Lamp Fault‖ from the

error

—

instrument  U015100

Airbag offline

No response to the message sent by airbag

Possible causes

conditions

The airbag receives the message

Airbag warning light

DTC trigger 

Wire fault



Warning

light

is

faulty 

Control unit fault



Wire fault



SDM

—

communication

to bus

error 

Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and instrument cluster connector T32a, check airbag controller connector T32b and instrument cluster connector T32a for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Disconnect body controller connector T40b, check the body controller connector T40b for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. Disconnect engine control unit connector T112 and body controller connector T24, check engine control unit connector T112 and body controller connector T24 for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 4.

4. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires between pins T32b/2 and T32b/17 of the airbag controller connector and pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the instrument cluster connector are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

271

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether the wire between pin T32b/26 of the airbag controller connector and pin T40b/39 of the body controller connector is open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether the wire between pin T32b/26 of the airbag controller connector and pin T112/26 of the engine control unit connector is open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

272

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires between pins T32b/2 and T32b/17 of the airbag controller connector and pins T16j/11 and T16j/3 of the OBD diagnostic interface are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 8.

8. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 9.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

9. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 10.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

10. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 11.

−

No - Replace the instrument cluster.

11. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 12.

−

No-Replace the body controller.

12. Replace the engine control unit, diagnose again, read the DTCs, and confirm whether the DTCs and symptom exist. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the engine control unit.

4 Seat Belt 4.1 Brief introduction 4.1.1 Pay attention to safety regulations of the seat belt retractor Danger If collision occurred, causing the seat belt retractor to work, the seat belt assembly must be replaced.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

273

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment



All the inspection, assembly and repair work are only allowed by trained technicians.



Do not open or repair the seat belt retractor (or else there is a risk of injury).



Do not re-install the seat belt retractor that has got violent collision or fallen on the ground.



Replace the seat belt retractor which has mechanical damage (pits or cracks).



Install the seat belt retractor immediately after it has been taken out from the transport container.



Do not use the compressed-air impact wrench to remove or install the seat belt retractor.



Do not place he seat belt retractor randomly.



Do not handle the seat belt retractor with grease, cleaning agent or similar items.Do not leave the seat belt retractor in places with a temperature above 100 ℃.

4.1.2 Disposal of seat belt retractor 

Recycle the un-triggered seat belt retractor in the form of the original packaging according to laws and regulations of the state.For any questions, please consult the sales center or the manufacturer.



Dispose of the triggered airbag retractor according to the waste regulations of the enterprise.

274

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4.2 Overview of seat belt

1 - Rear central seat belt

2 - Left rear seat belt assembly





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 281

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 280

3 - Height adjuster of the left front seat belt

4 - Driver side seat belt buckle





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 279

Check, replace if necessary

5 - Right front seat belt assembly

6 - Rear double buckle assembly





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 276

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 284

7 - Rear single buckle assembly 

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 284

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

275

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4.3 Removal and installation of the front seat belt assembly Removal Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the front left seat belt assembly, but may serve as a reference for the right side. Note 

Pay attention to safety regulations of the seat belt retractor.



Static electricity discharge may cause the belt retractor to trigger accidentally. Therefore, static electricity must be discharged before repairing the system, touch the vehicle body for a short while to discharge the static electricity.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Remove B-pillar lower trim panel => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 84; Interior equipment: trim panel and trim part; Removal and installation of the B-pillar lower trim panel. 3. Press the left front height adjuster switch -1- along the direction of the -Arrow- and pry the left front height adjuster switch cover -2-.

4. Unscrew the upper fixing bolt -Arrow-of the front seat belt and remove the upper fixing point of the front seat belt -1- from the left height adjuster. Bolt - Arrow - Specifications：M10×1.25×20 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 17mm hexagon sleeve

276

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of the seat belt guide ring and remove the seat belt guide ring-1-. Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 7 - 9 Nm

6. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow A- of front seat belt retractor and remove the seat belt retractor-1-. 7. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow B- of the front seat belt retractor and remove the front seat belt assembly -1-. Bolt - Arrow A - Specifications：M10×1.25×20 Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm Bolt -Arrow A- tool: 17mm hexagon sleeve

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check locking function of the left front seat belt assembly after installation.

4.4 Removal and installation of front seat belt buckle assembly Removal Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the driver side seat belt buckle assembly, but may serve as a reference for the front passenger side.

1. Remove front seat => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 89; Seat; Removal and installation of front seat belt buckle assembly: Removal and installation of front manual seat assembly.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

277

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Unscrew the fixing bolt of the driver side seat belt buckle assembly -Arrow-. Bolt - Arrow - Specifications：M10×1.25×20 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 17mm hexagon sleeve



Tips As sealant is applied on the bolt, it should be replaced every time it is loosened.



Clean the threads of corresponding nuts before installing new bolts.

3. Remove driver side seat belt buckle assembly -1- from the seat. Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

278

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4.5 Removal and installation of the height adjuster Removal Tips The instruction is only for removal and installation of the left height adjuster, but may serve as a reference for removal and installation of the right height adjuster.

1. Remove B-pillar upper trim panel=> Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 84; Interior equipment: trim panel and trim part; Removal and installation of the B-pillar upper trim panel. 2. Unscrew the fixing bolt component-Arrow- of the left height adjuster and remove the left height adjuster-1-. Bolt - Arrow - Specifications：M10×1.25×20 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 17mm hexagon sleeve

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check functions of the left height adjuster after installation.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

279

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4.6 Removal and installation of the rear seat belt assembly Removal Tips The instruction is only for removal and installation of the left rear seat belt assembly, but may serve as a reference for removal and installation of the right rear seat belt assembly. Note Pay attention to safety regulations of the seat belt retractor.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Remove left wheel cover trim panel assembly => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 84; Interior equipment; Trim part and trim panel: Remove wheel cover trim panel assembly. 3. Pry the left rear seat belt baffle -1- along the direction of the -Arrow-.

4. Remove cover plate of the seat belt upper fixing point -1-. 5. Unscrew the upper fixing bolt component -Arrow- of the left rear seat belt and remove the upper fixing point -1- of the left rear seat belt. Bolt - Arrow - Specifications：M10×1.25×80 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 17mm hexagon sleeve

280

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6. Unscrew the fixing bolt component-Arrow- of the left rear seat belt retractor and remove the left rear seat belt assembly -1-. Bolt - Arrow - Specifications：M10×1.25×20 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 17mm hexagon sleeve

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check locking function of the left rear seat belt assembly after installation.

4.7 Removal and installation of the rear central seat belt assembly Removal 1. Turn upward rear seat cushion assembly -1- at the position of -Arrow-A along the direction of -Arrow-B.

2. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow- and remove the lower fixing point -1- of the rear central seat belt. Bolt - Arrow - Specifications：M10×1.25×30 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 17mm hexagon sleeve

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

281

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow of the seat belt guide part and remove the guide part from the seat belt. Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 3 - 5 Nm

4. Press down the unlocking button -1- and lay down the rear seat backrest assembly.

5. Disengage the cable -Arrow- under the cover of the rear seat double backrest as well as left and right cables -1- and -2-. (Applicable to split backrest vehicle model only)

6. Remove C-ring -Arrow- at the bottom of the rear seat backrest cover and disengage rear seat double backrest cover -1-. (Applicable to integrated backrest vehicle model only) Tips  Replace the C-ring.

282

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7. Disengage rear backrest cover and underframe. 8. Remove the fixing bolt -Arrow- of rear central seat belt tightener and remove the rear central seat belt assembly -1-. Bolt - Arrow - Specifications：M10×1.25×20 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 16mm hexagon sleeve

Tips During installation, apply the thread glue on the bolts. Assembling Assemble in reverse order of disassembly procedures and please note the following: 

Replace the relevant damaged parts.



Check whether functions of the rear seat double backrest assembly are normal after assembly.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

283

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4.8 Removal and installation of the rear double buckle assembly Removal

1. Remove rear seat cushion assembly => Vehicle body and painting: Repair Group 89: Seat: Removal and installation of rear seat cushion assembly. 2. Unscrew the fixing bolt component -Arrow- of the rear double buckle assembly and remove the rear double buckle assembly -1-. Bolt - Arrow - Specifications：M10×1.25×30 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 17mm hexagon sleeve

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check connection function between seat belt buckle and tongue after installation.

4.9 Removal and installation of the rear single buckle assembly Removal

1. Removal of the rear seat cushion=>Body and paint;Repair group:89; Seat;Rear seat;Removal and installation of the rear seat cushion. 2. Unscrew fixing bolt component -Arrow- of the rear single buckle assembly and remove the rear single buckle assembly -1-. Bolt - Arrow - Specifications：M10×1.25×30 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 17mm hexagon sleeve

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Check connection function between seat belt buckle and tongue after installation.

284

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4.10 Seat belt: Check

Note Check the seat belt, if traffic accident occurred to the vehicle.Determine whether the seat belt needs replacement according to the damage extent confirmed by the inspection items.Explain to the customer the necessity to replace the seat belt. Inspection items: 1. Inspection of seat belt appearance 2. Inspection of seat belt retractor (locking function) 3. Visual inspection of seat belt buckle 4. Inspection of functions of seat belt buckle 5. Inspection of guide buckle and tongue 6. Inspection of fixtures and fixing points

4.10.1 Inspection of seat belt appearance Pull out the seat belt from the seat belt retractor device completely. Check whether the seat belt is dirty, and wash it with neutral soap if necessary. Danger 

If one of the two damages is detected (1 and 2) as below in the accident vehicle, then replace the seat belt together with the seat belt buckle and the seat belt height adjuster.



If the one of the damages described in 1, 2, 3 and 4 is detected in the non-accident vehicle, then only replace the damaged seat belt.

1. Seat belt broken, torn or scratched.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

285

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Torn fabric at the edge of the safety belts.

3. Burn marks, such as cigarette burns.

4. Distortion on one side, or wave-like edge of the safety belts.

4.10.2 Function test of seat belt retractor (locking function) The seat belt retractor device has a double locking function. The first locking function: triggered when the seat belt is pulled out quickly from the seat belt retractor device (pull quickly). Inspection Pull out the seat belt quickly from the seat belt retractor.If the seat belt is not equipped with locking function, then replace the seat belt and seat belt buckle as a whole. The second locking function: triggered by the process of moving vehicle is changed (locking function related to vehicle).

286

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Note For safety considerations, driving tests must be performed on the road lane without other cars, so as to avoid risks for other cars or pedestrians. Inspection 1. Fasten the seat belt. 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 20km/h and apply the service brake.If the seat belt is not locked during the process of braking, then replace the seat belt and seat belt buckle as a whole.

4.10.3 Visual inspection of seat belt buckle Check the seat belt buckle for crack. 

If any, replace the seat belt and the seat belt buckle.

4.10.4 Function test of seat belt buckle Locking test: Push the seat belt tongue into the buckle until a click sound is heard. Pull the seat belt with force to check whether the locking mechanism is normal. 

Repeat the test for at least 5 times, and replace the seat belt and the seat belt buckle, even if the tongue was not snapped into the buckle just once.

Unlocking test: 

Press the button on the seat belt buckle with fingers and the seat belt tongue will eject automatically from the buckle.



Repeat the test for at least 5 times, and replace the seat belt and the seat belt buckle as a whole, even if the tongue was not ejected from the buckle just once. Note

Never use grease on the button of seat belt buckle to eliminate noise or stiffness when operating the seat belt.

4.10.5 Check of fixture and fixing point Replace the seat belt and the seat belt buckle if the following conditions occur to the fixtures and the fixing points. 1. Fastening piece was deformed (stretched). 2. The height regulator doesn't work. 3. Fixing points (seats, columns and chassis) are twisted or the screw threads damaged. Tips If the damaged is not caused by road accident but by wear and tear, then replace only the corresponding damaged parts.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

287

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5 Side Airbag 5.1 System overview ECU check: ECU checks preparation of the protection device module when it is powered on and exerts continuous monitoring once started. ECU is able to check short circuit and open circuit inside the system, together with short circuit/electric leakage and open circuit of the battery. ECU monitors status of following modules: 

ECU internal accelerometer



ECU internal safety sensor



ECU microprocessor



Side crash sensor (if installed)



Driver airbag



Front passenger airbag



Side airbag (if installed)



Side air curtain (if installed)



Pre-tensioner seat belt retractor

ECU tests current of airbag and seat belt pre-tensioner actuating device and checks continuity of circuits. When it monitors any fault of the system or the part, warning light lights up to warn the driver. The airbag controller is connected with the body control module and the vehicle diagnostic connector through CAN bus.

5.1.1 Observe the security precautions for airbag operation. Danger The explosive filler of airbag contains toxic substances. If not handled properly, it can be dangerous! 

All the inspection, removal, installation and repair work are only allowed by trained technicians.



Test the airbag with the provided detection and measurement device, or there is a risk that the airbag might trigger.



Only adopt the operational method described in this repair manual. Disassembly of the airbag is particularly prohibited.



The defective parts and accessories must be replaced with new original ones.



Disconnect the battery negative cable before the airbag system starts to work. Wait for 1min after disconnection of the battery negative cable. When the airbag system is connected to the power supply, no one should stay in the vehicle.



Technicians should discharge static electricity before extracting (touching) the airbag. Touch some grounded metal parts, such as water pipes, heating pipes or metal brackets to discharge static electricity.



Install the airbag immediately after it is removed from the container. Put the airbag back in the container if the repair work is interrupted.



Do not place the airbag randomly.



The removed airbag should be stored with the impact absorbing device side up.



If the airbag has fallen onto the hard floor, or damaged, it cannot be used.



Storage and transportation should follow the laws and regulations on explosive and dangerous materials.



Vehicles equipped with side airbags are prohibited to use common seat covers, because this will affect the function of side airbags.



Replace all the fixing clips with new original ones.

288

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment



If the seat cover is damaged within the working range of side airbags, such as cracks, burn marks or holes, for safety reasons, replace the seat covers with original accessories. 为安全起见，必须更换新的原装配件更换座椅套。

5.12 Disposal of the airbag controller 

A faulty airbag which have not been triggered must be disposed of by a specialized company in accordance with the environmental protection law. To do this, use the specified transportation materials.



Dispose of the triggered airbag according to the waste regulations of the enterprise.

5.2 Overview of airbag

1-

Front passenger airbag

2-

Airbag controller



Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 294



Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 290

3 - Clock spring

4 - Side crash sensor





Total: 2 (one on each side)



Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 298

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 293

5- Side airbag (passenger)-

6 - Side air curtain (if any)





Total: 2 (one on each side)



Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 296

Total: 2 (one on each side)

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 295

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

289

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7 - Driver airbag

8 - Front passenger seat occupancy sensor

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 291

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 299

5.3 Removal and installation of airbag controller Removal Note Observe the security precautions for airbag operation. Tips The airbag controller is the control mechanism of the airbag system. It is installed in front of the gearshift and under the air conditioning case. Its installation direction has a requirement: the arrow on the airbag controller housing must be installed upwards and towards the front of the vehicle. 1. Unscrew and take out the retaining buckle -Arrow A- and pry the auxiliary instrument panel left front cover -1- and right front cover -2along the direction of -Arrow B-.

2. Unscrew the fixing nut of the airbag controller -Arrow- and remove the airbag controller 1. Nut - Arrow- specification：M6×1.0 Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 8 - 10 Nm Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 10mm hexagon sleeve

290

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Turn over locking mechanism of airbag controller the connecting plug along the direction of -Arrow B-, disengage connector -A- of the airbag controller -1- and remove the airbag controller.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Set the ignition ON (not necessarily to start the engine) after replacement of the airbag controller and configure the airbag controller according to hints of the diagnostic tester. Connect the diagnostic tester for testing.

5.4 Driver airbag 5.4.1 Brief introduction The driver airbag is installed at the center of the steering wheel. If a collision which exceeds a set limit occurs in the front, the airbag will ignite to protect the driver. The materials of the main airbag trim cover ensure that the driver airbag will tear off along the line and the airbag body can deploy promptly when the airbag is ignited.

5.4.2 Removal and installation of the driver airbag Removal Tips The length of the screwdriver used in the following operation should be about 155mm, with the width of cutter head of 4mm.

Note 

Observe the safety measures for airbag operation.



Static electricity discharge may cause the airbag to trigger accidentally.Therefore, discharge the static electricity by touching the vehicle body for a short while before repairing the system.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

291

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Press the unlocking device -Arrow- and remove the driver airbag -1with tools.

3. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the driver airbag and remove the driver airbag -1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Tips The click sound of the connector must be heard when it is inserted.

5.5 Clock spring 5.5.1 Brief introduction The clock spring is used for connecting driver airbag and airbag connecting harness. It is installed under the steering wheel of the vehicle. It mainly consists of flexible flat cable, housing that performs relative rotation, wiring harness (conductive lead) and connectors, etc. It is a kind of circuit connection that ensures the normal operation of electrical components (driver airbag and speaker switch, etc.) when the steering wheel is turning left or right. The driver airbag will rotate with the steering wheel (Imagine a harness with certain length intertwined on the steering wheel shaft.As the steering wheel is rotating, the harness might loosen reversely or get even tighter.Its limitation ensures that the harness will not break when the steering wheel rotates to the extreme left or right).Therefore, certain space should be left for the connecting harness to ensure that it will not be snapped when the steering wheel rotates to one end. This is especially important when installing.Try to keep the clock spring spindle in the middle position.

292

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5.5.2 Removal and installation of clock spring Removal Tips Make the wheels in linear running status before removal of the clock spring.

1. Remove steering wheel assembly => Chassis; Repair Group: 45; Steering system; Removal and installation of the steering wheel assembly. 2. Remove steering column upper guard -1- from the steering column lower guard -2-. 3. Unscrew the screw -Arrow- and remove the steering column lower guard-2-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 1.3 - 1.9 Nm

4. Disengage the connecting plug –Arrow A, arrow B of the clock springs

5. Unscrew the screw -Arrow- and remove the clock spring component-1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 4 - 6 Nm

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

293

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: 1. The yellow marks must locate in the visible window -Arrow- and the arrow marks -1- and -2- must align.

5.6 Front passenger airbag 5.6.1 Brief introduction Front passenger airbag: installed under the cover marked with SRS/AIR BAG and above the glove box on the right side of the instrument panel. If a collision which exceeds a set limit occurs in the front, the airbag will ignite to protect the front passenger. The materials of the airbag trim cover ensure that the airbag will tear off along the line and the airbag body can deploy promptly when the airbag is ignited. Front passenger airbag is used for reducing the injuries to head or chest of the passenger caused by a second collision with the interior trims. Once the auxiliary airbag is triggered, it can effectively protect the front passenger's head and chest. As the "front passenger side occupancy sensor" is also equipped on the front passenger side seat, when the control unit detects that the front passenger seat is without load, the front passenger side airbag will not ignite in vehicle collisions.

5.6.2 Removal and installation of the front passenger airbag Removal Note 

Observe the safety measures for airbag operation.



Static electricity discharge may cause the airbag to trigger accidentally.Therefore, discharge the static electricity by touching the vehicle body for a short while before repairing the system.

1. Remove instrument panel component => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 82; Instrument panel; Removal and installation of the instrument panel component

294

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Disengage fixing clip -Arrow- of the front passenger airbag and remove the front passenger airbag -1- from the fixing slot. The front passenger airbag cannot have compressional deformation in the process of removal.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures. The front passenger airbag cannot have compressional deformation in the process of installation.

5.7 Side airbag 5.7.1 Brief introduction Front seat side airbag is installed on the outside of the seat bracket under the covering.When side collision occurs, the airbag can protect the ribs, pelvis and upper internal organs. When side collision occurs, if the side crash sensor detects that the collision degree exceeds a preset limit, a control signal is transferred from the airbag controller to trigger the front seat side airbag. Whether the front seat side airbag triggers does not depend on the speed of vehicle, but the the side crash objects, the collision direction and the acceleration change of the vehicle. Therefore, some slight collision may cause injuries because the front seat side airbag are not deployed. On the contrary, some relatively small structural damage can cause the deployment of the front seat side airbag.

5.7.2 Removal and installation of side airbag The side airbag is integrated in the front seat that forms an inseparable integral with the front seat.

5.8 Side air curtain 5.8.1 Brief introduction Side air curtains are installed on the left and right sides of the vehicle roof.When the side impact exceeds a set limit, the air curtain can protect the occupants. In one side impact, the air curtain on only one side will be triggered. Side air curtains can ensure that when a collision occurs, the occupant's head will not crash on the vehicle body directly and prevent the occupants from get injuries by foreign objects.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

295

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5.8.2 Removal and installation of the side air curtain Removal Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left side air curtain, but may serve as a reference for the right side. Note



Observe the safety measures for airbag operation.



Static electricity discharge may cause the airbag to trigger accidentally.Therefore, discharge the static electricity by touching the vehicle body for a short while before repairing the system.

1. Remove interior top=> Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 84; Interior equipment; Trim part and trim panel: Removal and installation of the interior top. 2. Unscrew the fixing screw component -Arrow- of the left armrest mounting bracket and remove the left armrest mounting bracket -1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 8 - 10 Nm

296

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Disengage the connecting plug on the left side air curtain -Arrow-A. 4. Unscrew the fixing screw component -Arrow B- of the left side air curtain and remove the left side air curtain-1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 8 - 10 Nm Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

5.9 Crash sensor 5.9.1 Brief introduction The crash sensors are used to check crash deceleration and crash strength. When the airbag controller receives relevant parameters, it decides to send the airbag explosion command or not by its internal calculation. The crash sensor is an important component of the airbag system that functions to detect and determine the crash signal after a crash occurred. There are three types of crash sensors: 

Mechanical sensor: used mostly in early airbag systems, the mechanical sensor mainly applies the principle of inertia, and the gas generator is triggered by inertial force of components in the sensor to overcome the spring force. As the mechanical sensor will not activate the airbag at a low acceleration, it is highly reliable.However, it can only detect with single points, so the quality, precision and wear resistance of mechanical parts must be of high quality.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

297

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment



Electronic sensor: the electronic sensor is the earliest crash sensor ever used. Based on electronic principles, it uses electrical signals to reflect body deceleration, and then determines to explode the airbag or not according to the electrical signals.



The electromechanical sensor integrates both mechanical and electrical methods, and converts mechanical signals into electrical signals which are used to ignite the airbag. It not only possesses the advantages of the mechanical sensor, but also avoids its defects.

5.9.2 Removal and installation of side crash sensor Removal Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left side crash sensor, but may serve as a reference for the right side. Note 

Observe the safety measures for airbag operation.



Static electricity discharge may cause the airbag to trigger accidentally.Therefore, discharge the static electricity by touching the vehicle body for a short while before repairing the system.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 2. Remove B-pillar lower trim panel => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 84; Interior equipment: trim panel and trim part; Removal and installation of the B-pillar lower trim panel. 3. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow- of the left side crash sensor and remove the left side crash sensor -1-. Bolt - Arrow - Specifications：M6×1.0×30 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 11 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

4. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the left side crash sensor and remove the left side crash sensor -1-.

298

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

5.10 Removal and installation of the front passenger seat occupancy sensor The front passenger seat occupancy sensor is integrated in the front seat that forms an inseparable integral with the front seat.

Repair Group 72

- Protection System

299

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

73 Air Conditioning System 1 Brief introduction 1.1 Repair instructions for vehicle air conditioning system          

When repairing the air conditioning system, disconnect the negative terminal of the battery and the ambient environment and tools should be clean. Recover the refrigerant with special equipment before repairing the refrigerant circulation system. Take necessary actions for personal safety protection when carrying out relevant maintenance on the refrigerant, and avoid touching or inhaling the refrigerant. Overhaul of the air conditioning pipes must be conducted in a well-ventilated environment.Do not weld the air conditioning system which contains refrigerant. It is prohibited to discharge refrigerant directly into the atmosphere.Special equipment may be used for recovering refrigerant.Waste refrigerant should be disposed of according to relevant regulations. A container with refrigerant should be stored in a cool place.Do not place it in sunlight or at a high temperature to prevent it from expanding and bursting. Use the original O-rings.Apply a small amount of refrigerant oil when installing the sealing rings. Use special maintenance equipment for the R-134a refrigerant. Vacuum the system before filling the refrigerant. Refrigerant and refrigerant oil should be stored as required.Avoid mixing with water or other impurities from the air.Refrigerant oil that has not been stored in a sealed container or expired refrigerant cannot be used.

1.2 Instructions for R-134a Refrigerant 

      

Modern automobiles generally use R-134a refrigerant in the air conditioning system. With a standard evaporation temperature of -26.5 ℃ , R-134a refrigerant has the following features: high safety, colorless,odorless, and incombustible; low toxicity and chemical stability; large latent heat and heat capacity, good refrigeration capacity; good thermal conductivity; low viscosity, good mobility; no damage to the ozone layer; small metal corrosion, high stability, insoluble in water; low freezing point, suitable for low temperature operation; easy to detect for leakage. Please use the vehicle air conditioning refrigerant properly.Take protective measures to avoid any personal injury. As the refrigerant does not contain oxygen and its density is high, once released in a limited space, it will fill up the narrow space and squeeze out the oxygen, leading to local oxygen deprivation. The refrigerant is not combustible or explosive, but once contacted with open flame, it may decompose harmful gases (phosgene). As the refrigerant evaporates very quickly in atmospheric environment, if the liquid is stick to the skin, it will absorb a lot of heat to evaporate, causing local frostbite. The storage container for refrigerant should reserve space for expansion.

1.3 Instructions for refrigerant oil As a special lubricant for air-conditioning compressor, refrigerant oil ensures the normal and reliable operation of the compressor and extends its lifespan. It provides functions as lubrication, sealing, cooling and noise reduction in the compressor for the air conditioning refrigeration system. Precautions for refrigerant oil:  Use the refrigerant oil of the same type for the original air-conditioning system.Never use different types or brands of refrigerant oil.  As the moisture adsorption capacity of the refrigerant oil is extremely strong, when filling or replacing, the operations must be conducted rapidly.Cover and seal the container of refrigerant oil immediately after filling to avoid leakage.  Do not use expired refrigerant oil.  Fill the refrigerant oil in accordance with the specified quantity, as excessive filling may reduce the cooling effect.  Recover the refrigerant slowly, so the refrigerant oil will not be discharged together with the refrigerant.

300

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

1.4 Description of air conditioning system The air conditioning system is a device for refrigeration, heating, dehumidification and ventilation of the air inside the vehicle. It can provide a comfortable environment for occupants, reduce driver fatigue, and improve traffic safety. With the heat transmission effect, the air conditioning system transmits the heat in the air to a low temperature area.When the evaporator is at a low temperature, it will absorb heat from the outside.With the refrigerant as a medium being pumped into the compressor, its temperature will rise after compression and is much higher than the ambient temperature.As the refrigerant at a high temperature flows into the condenser, the electronic fan will emit heat to the outside to reduce the temperature.Due to the expansion throttling effect, the refrigerant at a low temperature flows into the evaporator and the working cycle continues to absorb heat inside the vehicle, so as to achieve cooling effect. The air conditioning system consists of compressor, condenser, evaporator, expansion valve, receiver-drier, pipe, condenser fan, blower motor and control unit. The air conditioning refrigerant circulation pipeline system is divided into the high-pressure and the low-pressure pipeline. Refrigeration principle of air conditioning: High pressure side

Low pressure side

Cold air

High-pressure gas High-pressure liquid Evaporator

Interior hot air

Low-pressure liquid Low-pressure gas

Compressor

Blower Expansion valve

Condenser

Exterior air

Receiver-drier

1.

For the refrigeration of the air conditioning system, the gaseous refrigerant of low temperature and low pressure is absorbed by the compressor from the evaporator.After compression, the temperature and pressure of refrigerant will rise and it is sent to the condenser. In the condenser, gaseous refrigerant of high temperature and high pressure radiates heat through the condenser, then it is changed into liquid refrigerant with high temperature and high pressure.

2.

Liquid refrigerant flows into the receiver-drier, which is used to store and filter.

3.

The filtered liquid refrigerant of high temperature and high pressure flows through the expansion valve, and transfers to a gas/liquid mixture of low temperature and low pressure.It is then sent into the evaporator.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

301

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4.

In the evaporator, air is pumped into the evaporator surface by the blower.The air exchanges heat with aerosol refrigerant of low temperature and low pressure through the evaporator fins. After absorbing the air heat in the vehicle, the aerosol refrigerant of low temperature and low pressure is evaporated into gaseous refrigerant of low temperature and low pressure.It is sent to the compressor low pressure end via pipeline for the next cycle.

5.

The cold air after the heat exchange process is sent into the vehicle by the blower to reduce internal temperature.

Heating of air conditioning system: 

The heating function of air conditioning is provided by the excess heat from the engine coolant. After the engine is warm, turn on the heater switch on the air-conditioning control panel, and then the coolant in the engine is continuously circulating in the heating core body of the air conditioning. The wind from the blower motor passes the heating core body and then hot air keeps flowing into the interior of the vehicle.

Ventilation of air conditioning system: 

The ventilation of air conditioning is to introduce fresh air from the outside while the vehicle is running, and to discharge the dirty car air from the inside, so as to keep the air fresh within the vehicle, and also to prevent the window glass from fog.

Dehumidification of air conditioning: 

In rainy days or when the temperature between inside and outside of the vehicle differs too much, the window glass is easy to become foggy.The dehumidification of air conditioning can clear the fog on the window.

2 Check and Diagnosis 2.1 Air conditioning system pressure too high No. 0

Inspection steps Preliminary Inspection Check whether the refrigerant is excessive

1

2

Check the radiator fin of condenser Check whether the radiator fin of condenser is blocked Check the electronic fan

4

5

302

Proceed to Step 1.

Refrigerant excessive

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Normal

Radiator fin of condenser blocked There's a fault

Proceed to Step 3.

Electronic fan damaged

Operation methods Adjust the amount of refrigerant to the nominal value

Check the expansion valve Check whether the expansion valve is blocked or defective Check the compressor

Normal

There's a fault

Clean or replace the condenser Operation methods Check the electronic fan and replace the assembly if necessary Operation methods

Proceed to Step 4.

Expansion valve blocked or defective

Replace the expansion valve

Normal

There's a fault

Check whether the compressor is damaged

Proceed to Step 5.

Compressor damaged

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods Replace the air conditioning compressor Operation methods

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

Check whether the electronic fan is damaged 3

Normal

Check results There's a fault

Check the operation After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether the fault is still there.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

Proceed to Step 2.

Find the cause from other symptoms

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2.2 Air conditioning system pressure too low No. 0

1

Inspection steps Preliminary Inspection Check whether any air conditioning pipeline is leaky Check the refrigerant

3

4

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 1.

Air conditioning pipeline leaky

Replace the air conditioning pipeline

Normal

There's a fault

Proceed to Step 2.

Refrigerant insufficient

Normal

Check the expansion valve Check whether the expansion valve is blocked or defective Check the compressor

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods Adjust the amount of refrigerant to the standard value Operation methods

Proceed to Step 3.

Expansion valve blocked or defective

Replace the expansion valve

Normal

There's a fault

Check whether the compressor is damaged

Proceed to Step 4.

Compressor damaged

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods Replace the air conditioning compressor Operation methods

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

Normal

Check results There's a fault

Check whether the refrigerant is insufficient 2

Check results There's a fault

Check the operation After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether the fault is still there.

Find the cause from other symptoms

2.3 Air conditioning cannot refrigerate No. 0

1

2

3

4

5

Inspection steps Preliminary Inspection Check whether the refrigerant is insufficient or excessive Check the pressure of refrigeration system Check whether the pressure of refrigeration system is insufficient Check the air conditioning relay Check whether the air conditioning relay is damaged Check the fuse Check whether the fuse is blown Check the evaporator temperature sensor Check whether the evaporator temperature sensor is defective Check the air conditioning controller Check whether air conditioning controller is damaged

Operation methods Adjust the amount of refrigerant to the standard value

Proceed to Step 1.

Refrigerant insufficient or excessive

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 2.

Refrigeration system pressure insufficient

Check the pipeline for leakage, and fill the refrigerant if necessary

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 3.

Air conditioning relay damaged

Replace the air conditioning relay

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 4.

Fuse blown

Replace the fuse

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 5.

Evaporator temperature sensor defective

Replace the evaporator temperature sensor

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 6.

Air conditioning controller damaged

Replace the air conditioning controller

Repair Group 73- A/C System

303

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

No. 6

7

Inspection steps Check the expansion valve Check whether the expansion valve is blocked or defective Check the air conditioning compressor Check whether the compressor is damaged

8

Check the operation After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether the fault is still there.

Check results There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 7.

Expansion valve blocked or defective

Replace the expansion valve

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Normal

Proceed to Step 8.

Compressor damaged

Normal

There's a fault

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

Replace the air conditioning compressor Operation methods Find the cause from other symptoms

2.4 Compressor abnormal sound No. 0

1

2

3

4

Inspection steps Preliminary Inspection Check whether the air conditioning compressor multi-wedge belt is slipping Check the multi-wedge belt Check whether the multi-wedge belt is aging Check the compressor component Check whether the compressor component is loose Check the compressor bearing Check whether the compressor bearing is damaged Check the operation After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether the fault is still there.

Normal Proceed to Step 1.

Check results There's a fault Air conditioning compressor multi-wedge belt slipping

Operation methods Adjust the tension of multi-wedge belt

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 2.

Multi-wedge belt aging

Replace the multi-wedge belt

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 3.

Compressor component loose

Tighten the component

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 4.

Compressor bearing damaged

Replace the compressor

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

Find the cause from other symptoms

Normal

Check results There's a fault

2.5 Cooling air not continuous No. 0

Inspection steps Preliminary Inspection Check whether water leaks in the refrigerant circulation circuit

1

304

Check the air conditioning pressure sensor Check whether the air conditioning pressure sensor signal has an error

Repair Group 73- A/C System

Operation methods Vacuum the air conditioning system and replace the receiver-drier

Proceed to Step 1.

Water leaks in the refrigerant circulation circuit

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 2.

Air conditioning pressure sensor signal error

Replace the air conditioning pressure sensor

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

No.

Inspection steps

Check results

Check the evaporator

2

Normal

temperature sensor Check whether the evaporator temperature

Proceed to Step 3.

sensor is damaged 3

Check the air conditioning Check whether the

4

Operation methods Check the evaporator

Evaporator temperature

temperature sensor and

sensor damaged

replace if necessary

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 4.

Compressor damaged

Replace the compressor

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

compressor compressor is damaged

There's a fault

Check the operation After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether

Find the cause from other symptoms

the fault is still there.

3 Technical parameters Tightening torque Name

Torque

Specification

Grade

Compressor fixing bolt

M8×1.25×100

8.8

22～30

Fixing bolt between compressor and pipe

M8×1.25×30

8.8

25～30

M6×1.25×30

8.8

9～12

M6×1.25×25

8.8

9～12

—

—

6～7

M6×1.0×30

—

9～12

M6×1.0

—

5

—

Pressure switch

—

—

4.5～6

—

Fixing bolt of air conditioning receiver-drier

—

—

20～25

10mm Allen key

—

—

22～25

—

—

—

12～17

—

Fixing nut of heater evaporator assembly

M6×1.0

—

9～12

Fixing nut of air intake chamber assembly

M6×1.0

—

9～12

Connecting bolt between condenser pipeline and high-pressure hose Condenser fixing bolt Fixing bolt of expansion valve Fixing bolt of expansion valve plate Fixing nut of the air conditioning controller

Connecting

nut

of

air

conditioning

of

air

conditioning

high/low-pressure pipe Connecting

nut

high/low-pressure pipe

Nm

Tools 10mm Hexagon Sleeve 10mm Hexagon Sleeve 10mm Hexagon Sleeve 10mm Hexagon Sleeve — 8mm Hexagon Sleeve

10mm Hexagon Sleeve 10mm Hexagon Sleeve

Repair Group 73- A/C System

305

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code 4.1 DTC fault code list Fault Code

Definition

U010000

Loss of communication with EMS

U014000

Loss of communication with BCM

U100700

Bus is turned off

U300317

The battery voltage is too high

U300317

The battery voltage is too low

B130114

Evaporator temperature out of range

B133314

Mode motor open or short fault

B132914

Temperature motor open or short fault

B133614

Internal and external circulation motors open or short fault

B134011

Reference voltage short

4.2 B130114 Evaporator Temperature out of Range DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

B130114

Evaporator temperature out of range

—

Resistance

of

Possible causes the

evaporator sensor is out of



Wire fault



Evaporation temperature sensor

the range, over 40KΩ or less than 209Ω

fault 

Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect evaporator temperature sensor connector T3at and air conditioning control unit connector T16e, check evaporator temperature sensor connector T3at and air conditioning control unit connector T16e for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

306

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Check whether the wire between pin T3at/1 of the evaporator temperature sensor connector and pin T16e/16 of the air conditioning control unit connector is open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. Disconnect battery negative cable. 4. Check whether the pin T3at/1 of the evaporator temperature sensor connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

307

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether the pin T3at/1 of the evaporator temperature sensor connector is short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether pin T3at/3 of the evaporator temperature sensor connector and the body grounding is conductive. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

7. Check whether power supply and grounding of the air conditioning controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Replace the evaporator temperature sensor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 9.

−

No Replace the evaporator temperature sensor.

9. Replace the A/C controller and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the air conditioning controller.

308

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4.3 B133314 Mode Motor Open or Short Fault DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions

Possible causes 

Environmental sensor short to the



Keep

the

operating, B133314

Mode motor open or short fault

—

mode

motor

and

make

battery 

Environmental

mode+ and mode- short for

sensor

one minute or make the

connected

mode

motor

feedback



signal open

not

Exterior temperature sensor fault



Controller fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect mode motor connector T5ee and air conditioning control unit connector T16e, check mode motor connector T5ee and air conditioning control unit connector T16e for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires between pins T5ee/2, T5ee/3 and T5ee/5 of the mode motor connector and pins T16e/14, T16e/13 and T16e/1 of the air conditioning control unit connector are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

309

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Disconnect battery negative cable. 4. Check whether pins T5ee/2, T5ee/3 and T5ee/5 of the mode motor connector are short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether pins T5ee/2, T5ee/3 and T5ee/5 of the mode motor connector are short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

310

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6. Check whether the wires between pins T5ee/1 and T5ee/4 of the mode motor connector and pins T16e/15 and T16e/2 of the air conditioning control unit connector are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

7. Disconnect battery negative cable. 8. Check whether pins T5ee/1 and T5ee/4 of the mode motor connector are short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 8.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

311

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

8. Check whether pins T5ee/1 and T5ee/4 of the mode motor connector are short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 9.

9. Check whether power supply and grounding of the air conditioning controller are normal. −

Yes Proceed to Step 10.

−

No, repair the failed wires.

10. Replace the exterior temperature sensor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 11.

−

No Replace exterior temperature sensor

11. Replace the A/C controller and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the air conditioning controller.

4.4 B132914 Temperature Motor Open or Short Fault DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

Keep

the

Possible causes

temperature

motor operating, and make B132914

Temperature motor open or short fault

temperature+ —

and

temperature - short for one minute

or

make

temperature

the motor



Wire fault



Temperature mixture motor fault



Control unit fault

feedback signal open Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect air conditioning controller connector T16e and cooling/heating motor connector T5ay, check air conditioning controller connector T16e and cooling/heating motor connector T5ay for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

312

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Disconnect battery negative cable. 3. Check whether pins T5ay/4 and T5ay/5 of the cooling/heating motor connector are short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 4.

4. Check whether the wires between pins T16e/3 and T16e/4 of the air conditioning controller connector and pins T5ay/4 and T5ay/5 of the cooling/heating motor connector are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

313

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether pins T5ay/4 and T5ay/5 of the cooling/heating motor are short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether pins T5ay/1, T5ay/2 and T5ay/3 of the air conditioning controller connector are short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

314

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7. Check whether the wires between pins T16e/15, T16e/14 and T16e/12 of the air conditioning controller connector and pins T5ay/1, T5ay/2 and T5ay/3 of the cooling/heating motor connector are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 8.

8. Check whether pins T5ay/1, T5ay/2 and T5ay/3 of the air conditioning controller connector are short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 9.

9. Check whether power supply and grounding of the air conditioning controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 10.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

10. Replace the cooling and heating motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 11.

−

No-Replace the cooling/heating motor.

11. Replace the A/C controller and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the air conditioning controller.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

315

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4.5 B133614 Internal and External Circulation Motors Open or Short Fault DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions 

Keep internal and external circulation

Internal and external B133614

circulation motors open or short fault

operating, —

Possible causes

internal

and and

motors



Wire fault

make



Inner

external

circulation

circulation+ and internal and external circulation -

and

outer motor

fault 

Control unit fault

short for one minute Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect air conditioning controller connector T16e and internal and external circulation motors connectors T5af, check air conditioning controller connector T16e and mode motor connector T5af for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Disconnect battery negative cable. 3. Check whether pins T16e/5, T16e/6 and T16e/7 of the air conditioning controller connector are short to the positive terminal of the battery. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 4.

316

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4. Check whether the wires between pins T16e/5, T16e/6 and T16e/7 of the air conditioning controller connector and pins T5af/1, T5af/2 and T5af/5 of internal and external circulation motors connectors are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether pins T16e/5, T16e/6 and T16e/7 of the air conditioning controller connector are short to the body grounding. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the air conditioning controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

7. Replace the mode motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 9.

−

No-Replace the mode motor.

8. Replace the A/C controller and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the air conditioning controller.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

317

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4.6 U010000 EMS Communication Loss U014000 BCM Communication Loss U100700 Bus Closed DTC

DTC Definition

DTC testing

DTC trigger conditions

conditions

Possible causes 

U010000

EMS communication loss

 — 

 U014000

BCM communication loss

—

conditioner

lost for 15s

circuit

Power mode is RUN for 5s

BCM message (0x4A0) is After the power mode is RUN for 5s

 U100700

Bus is turned off

—

of

EMS message (0x3A0) is

The relevant ECU has no successful bus off status

ECU

EMS circuit fault



Controller fault



Fault

of

conditioner

air ECU

circuit 

BCM circuit fault



Controller fault



Fault

of

conditioner

message

sending in two continuous

air



lost for 15s 

Fault

air ECU

circuit 

Wire fault



Controller fault

Diagnostic steps: 1. Disconnect air conditioning controller connector T12e and check air conditioning controller connector T12e for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Disconnect body controller connector T40b, check the body controller connector T40b for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

318

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires between pins T12e/8 and T12e/7 of the air conditioning controller connector and pins T40b/36 and T40b/37 of the body controller connector are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 4.

4. Disconnect engine control unit connector T112 and body controller connector T24, check engine control unit connector T112 and body controller connector T24 for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

−

No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether wires between pins T112/17 and T112/1 of the engine control unit connector and pins T40a/9 and T40a/8 of the body controller connector are conductive. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 6.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

319

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires between pins T16j/11 and T16j/3 of the OBD diagnostic interface and pins T12e/8 and T12e/7 of the air conditioning control unit connector are open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 7.

7. Check whether power supply and grounding of the air conditioning controller are normal. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Replace the A/C controller and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its symptoms remain. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No-Replace the air conditioning controller.

4.7 U300317 Battery Overvoltage U300317 Battery Undervoltage B134011 Reference Voltage Short DTC

U300317

U300317

DTC Definition

The battery voltage is too high

The battery voltage is too low

DTC testing conditions

DTC trigger conditions

 — 

 — 

 B134011

Reference voltage short

—

Battery voltage is < 9V for 500ms Power mode is RUN for 5s

Battery voltage is > 16V for 500ms; Power mode is RUN for 5s

Make the 5V reference voltage interface short to ground

Possible causes            

320

Repair Group 73- A/C System

Wire fault The battery voltage is too high Charging overvoltage Controller fault Wire fault The battery voltage is too low Charging undervoltage Controller fault Wire fault The battery voltage is too low Charging undervoltage Controller fault

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Diagnostic steps: 1. Check whether the battery charging circuit is normal, and whether the terminal is loose and corrodes. −

Repair faulty wire, tighten or clean the terminals.

−

No Proceed to step 2.

2. Extract the fuses FB25 (5A) and FB53 (10A) out of the instrument panel electrical box and check whether the fuses FB25 (5A) and FB53 (10A) in the instrument panel electrical box are blown. −

Yes-Replace the fuse.

−

No Proceed to step 3.

3. Check whether the battery voltage is within the normal range. −

Yes

−

No, repair or replace battery.

Proceed to Step 4.

4. Check whether the generator power voltage is within normal range. −

Yes

−

No, repair or replace the generator.

Proceed to Step 5.

5. Disconnect air conditioning controller connector T12e and check air conditioning controller connector T12e for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust. −

Yes, clean the connector and pins.

−

No Proceed to step 6.

6. With the ignition under ON status, check whether the voltage between pin T12e/1 of the air conditioning controller connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 7.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

321

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the voltage between pin T12e/2 of the air conditioning controller connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage. −

Yes - Proceed to Step 8.

−

No - Repair the faulty line.

8. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wire between pin T12e/3 of the air conditioning controller connector and body grounding is open. −

Yes-Repair the faulty wire.

−

No Proceed to step 9.

9. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists. −

Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

−

No - Replace the airbag controller.

322

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5 Electric Digital Display Air Conditioning 5.1 Overview of Functions of the Electric Digital Display Air Conditioning Adjuster

1 - AC Switch

2 - Wind speed+/Wind speed-





Turning on and off of the refrigeration function control. When the engine is

Reduce air-out speed.

started, press down the air conditioning button, then the refrigeration function request is output. At this time, ECU will receive the air conditioning request signal and take control of the air conditioning refrigeration function according to ECU internal procedure strategy 5s after the engine is started. Press the air conditioning button and the working condition indicator on the switch lights up. 3 - Air conditioner OFF button

4 - Mode adjustment button





Press the OFF button and all the air conditioning actuation mechanisms stop

Adjust air-out mode

functioning.No display on the LCD. After the controller monitor is turned down by the OFF button, two function buttons 8 and 9 still can switch fresh air.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

323

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5 - Internal and external circulation mode

6 - Front defrost quick button





The yellow indicator of the switch lights up, which

Press air-out mode quick button to switch to front

indicates that the fresh air flap is open and the fresh air

defrost and press the button again to restore

can enter into the vehicle compartment.

automatically to the last status

7 - Temperature +/ Temperature-

8 - Rear defrost quick button





Increase air-out temperature

When the rear defrost mode is ON, the switch indicator lights up; when the defrost mode is OFF, the switch indicator goes out. The rear windscreen heating can only work effectively with the engine running and will shut off automatically after 15 minutes Heating component inside the rear windscreen is extremely vulnerable to damage

5.2 Electric digital display air conditioning–Passenger zone

1 - Evaporator temperature sensor

2-

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 342

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 338

3 - Mode motor

4-

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 338

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 341

324

Repair Group 73- A/C System

Cooling/heating motor Blower motor

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5 - Front defrost air duct

6 - Central air duct





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 343

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 345

7 - Left air vent

8 - Instrument panel





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 349

Remove the instrument panel=>Vehicle body and painting; Repair group:82; Instrument panel; Removal and installation of instrument panel.

9 - Right air vent

10 - Air conditioning control panel





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 349

Air conditioner operation panel and DA machine/AVN navigation operation panel are integrated and located on DA machine/AVN navigation, which are inseparable

11 - Heater evaporator

12 - Air intake chamber





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 329

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 336

13 - Rear air duct1

14 - Rear air duct2





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 346

15 - Remove the air conditioning case body assembly

16 -





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 325

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 346 A/C controller The air conditioning controller is located behind the right glove box assembly of the instrument panel



Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 337

17 - Multi-functional display 

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 220

6 Heater Evaporator Assembly 6.1 Removal and installation of the heater evaporator assembly Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

Hose clamp

Repair Group 73- A/C System

325

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Clamp

Removal Note 

As there is pressure in the cooling system, release the pressure and reduce the temperature as needed before repairing.



When the engine is warming up, the coolant temperature may exceed 100 ℃, so there is danger of scald.Conduct the repair work after the engine cools down.

1. Fix the coolant hoses -1- and -2- with the hose clamp, release the coolant hoses clamp -Arrow- with clamp tool, and disengage the heater core and the coolant hoses -1- and -2-.

2. Insert the pneumatic gun -A- into the coolant pipe on the side of heater core. 3. Put a container -B- with scales on the other side of the coolant pipe -C-. Tips A container with scale helps to determine the approximate value of filling volume. 4. Blow the coolant in the heater core into container -B- with the pneumatic gun, and discharge the coolant as much as possible.

5. Remove expansion valve => Refer to page 382.

326

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6. Remove the harness clip -1- and unscrew the nut -Arrow-. Nut - Arrow- specification：M6×1.0 Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 10mm hexagon sleeve

7. Remove rear air duct => Refer to page 346. 8. Remove instrument panel beam => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 82; Instrument panel; Removal and installation of the instrument panel beam. 9. Disengage the connecting plug -1- of the speed control module 2. Tips No need to pay attention to the -Arrow-.

10. Disengage the connecting plug -2- on the mode motor -1-. Tips No need to attention -Arrow B- or -Arrow A-.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

327

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

11. Disengage the connecting plug -1- on the mode motor -2-. Tips No need to pay attention to the -Arrow-.

12. Disengage the connecting plug -2- on the cooling/heating motor -1-. Tips No need to pay attention to the -Arrow-.

13. Disengage the connecting plug -2- on the circulating motor -1-. Tips No need to pay attention to the -Arrow-.

14. Disengage the connecting plug -2- on the evaporator temperature sensor -1-. Tips No need to pay attention to the -Arrow-.

328

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

15. Unscrew the nut -Arrow-. Nut - Arrow- specification：M6×1.0 Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 10mm hexagon sleeve 16. Remove the air conditioning case body assembly.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Before installation of the air conditioning heater evaporator, check whether the seal sponge at the place of air conditioner drain pipe is damaged or omitted. It is required that the seal sponge is securely bonded with air conditioning heater evaporator and uniformly attached to body dash panel! Tips Add coolants to the standard level, and check the tightness of the coolant pipeline.

6.2 Disassembly of the heater evaporator assembly Removal

1. Remove heater evaporator assembly=> Refer to page 325. 2. Disengage the connection between heater evaporator -1- and air intake chamber -2- from the area of joint part -Arrow A-. Tips Pay attention to the positioning pin -Arrow B- when disengaging the connection between heater evaporator-1- and air intake chamber -2-.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

329

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Pry out the fixing clips on the left and right sides-Arrow A-. 4. Take out the front defroster air duct -1- in the direction of -Arrow B-.

5. Unscrew the screw -Arrow- and remove the harness bracket -1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

6. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of the left front feet-blowing air duct and remove the left front feet-blowing air duct assembly -1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

7. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of the right front feet-blowing air duct- and remove the right front feet-blowing air duct assembly -1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

330

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

8. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow A- on the blower motor. Screw -Arrow A- tightening torque:0.7±1.1 Nm 9. Rotate the blower motor in the direction of -Arrow B- slightly, and remove the blower motor -1- from the heater evaporator assembly housing. 10. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow C- and remove the speed control module -2-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

11. Loosen the screw -Arrow- and remove the pipeline clamp-1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

12. Loosen the screw -Arrow- and disengage the pipeline connecting clamp-1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm 13. Disengage the pipeline from the heater core.

14. Remove the heater core -1- from the heater evaporator housing. 15. Take out the evaporator temperature sensor -2- by rotating in the direction of -Arrow-.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

331

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

16. Pry up the fixing clip -Arrow- and remove the cover plate -1-.

17. Unscrew the screw -Arrow A-. Screw -Arrow A- tightening torque:2±3 Nm 18. Pry down the fixing clip -Arrow B- and remove the lower housing -1- of the heater evaporator.

332

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

19. Pry down the fixing clip -Arrow A- and unscrew the screw -Arrow B-. Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm 20. Disengage heater evaporator left housing -1- and heater evaporator right housing -2-. Tips Tip: pay attention to the locking clip at the fixing position of the screw when disengaging heater evaporator left housing and heater evaporator right housing. 21. Remove the evaporator core -3-. Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

333

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6.3 Breakdown overview of heater evaporator

1-

Cooling/heating motor

2 - Heater evaporator right housing



Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 338



Check, replace if necessary

3 - Heater evaporator left housing

4-

Blower motor





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 341

Check, replace if necessary

5 - Mode motor

6 - Speed control module





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 338

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 342

7 - Evaporation core

8 - Expansion valve





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 370

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 382

9 - Heater evaporator lower housing

10 - Heater core



Check, replace if necessary



334

Repair Group 73- A/C System

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 366

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6.4 Breakdown overview of air intake chamber

1 - Air inlet upper housing

2 - Air inlet lower housing





Check, replace if necessary

Check, replace if necessary

3 - Upper housing of air intake chamber

4 - Lower housing of air intake chamber





Check, replace if necessary

Check, replace if necessary

5 - A/C air filter

6 - Cover plate of the air conditioning air filter





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 348

Check, replace if necessary

7 - Circulation motor 

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 339

Repair Group 73- A/C System

335

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7 Removal and installation of air intake chamber assembly Removal

1. Remove instrument panel beam => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 82; Instrument panel; Removal and installation of the instrument panel beam. 2. Disengage the connecting plug -2- on the circulating motor -1-. Tips No need to pay attention to the -Arrow-.

3. Unscrew the nut -Arrow- and remove the air intake chamber assembly. Nut - Arrow- specification：M6×1.0 Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 10mm hexagon sleeve

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

336

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

8 Control System 8.1 Removal and installation of the air conditioning controller Removal

1. Remove the glove box lining=>Vehicle body and painting: Repair group:82; Instrument panel:Removal and installation of glove box lining. 2. Unscrew the nut -Arrow- of air conditioning controller and remove the nut -Arrow- from the mounting bracket. Nut - Arrow- specification：M6×1.0 Nut -Arrow- tightening torque: 5 Nm Nut -Arrow-Size: 10mm hexagon sleeve

3. Disengage connector -Arrow- and remove the air conditioning controller -1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures. Set the ignition ON (not necessarily to start the engine) after replacement of the air conditioning controller and configure the air conditioning controller according to hints of the diagnostic tester. Connect the diagnostic tester for testing.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

337

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

8.2 Removal and installation of mode motor Removal Tips Mode motor is located at the rear of the instrument panel left lower trim panel.

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable=>Electrical Equipment: Repair Group: 60; Power Distribution; Battery: Battery Cables: Disconnection and Connection of Battery Negative Cable. 2. Unscrew the fixing screw of the mode motor -Arrow-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 0.7 - 1.1 Nm 3. Disengage the connecting plug of the mode motor 4. Remove the mode motor -2-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

8.3 Removal and installation of cooling/heating motor Removal Tips The cooling/heating motor is located on the right front baffle side of the auxiliary instrument panel.

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable=>Electrical Equipment: Repair Group: 60; Power Distribution; Battery: Battery Cables: Disconnection and Connection of Battery Negative Cable.

338

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Unscrew and remove the fixing clip -Arrow A-, 3. Pry down right front cover plate -1 of the auxiliary instrument panel along the direction of -Arrow B-

4. Unscrew the fixing screw of the cooling/heating motor-Arrow-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 0.7 - 1.1 Nm 5. Disengage the connecting plug -2- of the cooling/heating motor. 6. Remove the cooling/heating motor-1-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

8.4 Removal and installation of circulation motor Removal

1. Remove the glove box lining=>Vehicle body and painting:Repair group:82; Instrument panel:Removal and installation of glove box lining.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

339

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 0.7 - 1.1 Nm 3. Disengage the connecting plug -2- of the circulation motor. 4. Remove the circulation motor-1-.

Tips Do not change the position of circulating air flap. Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Tips Check the functions of the circulating air flap after the installation.

340

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

8.5 Removal and installation of pressure switch Removal Tips Pressure switch is located in the right rear of the engine compartment.

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable=>Electrical Equipment: Repair Group: 60; Power Distribution; Battery: Battery Cables: Disconnection and Connection of Battery Negative Cable. 2. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group: 01: General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant. 3. Disengage the connecting plug of the pressure switch-Arrow-A and unscrew the high-pressure pipe from the pressure switch -1-. Pressure switch -1- tightening torque:4.5 - 6 Nm Tips Seal all the opened refrigerant circuit components with suitable sealing cover to prevent air or other impurities from entering.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Tips  Replace the O-ring when installing 

Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

8.6 Removal and installation of blower motor Removal Tips The blower motor is located at the right side of the accelerator pedal.

1. Remove electric power steering controller => chassis; Repair Group: 45; Steering system; Removal and installation of the electric power steering controller. 2. Remove mounting bracket of the electric power steering controller.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

341

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow B- on the blower motor. Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 0.7 - 1.1 Nm 4. Disengage the connecting plug -2- on the blower motor. 5. Rotate the blower motor in the direction of -Arrow A- slightly, and remove the blower motor -1- from the heater evaporator assembly housing.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

8.7 Removal and installation of speed control module Removal Tips Speed control module is located on the side of the blower motor.

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable=>Electrical Equipment: Repair Group: 60; Power Distribution; Battery: Battery Cables: Disconnection and Connection of Battery Negative Cable. 2. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 0.7 - 1.1 Nm 3. Disengage the connecting plug -1- of the speed control module. 4. Remove the speed control module -2-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

8.8 Evaporator temperature sensor Removal

342

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Tips Evaporator temperature sensor is located on the side of the cooling/heating motor (bottom).

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable=>Electrical Equipment: Repair Group: 60; Power Distribution; Battery: Battery Cables: Disconnection and Connection of Battery Negative Cable. 2. Unscrew and remove the fixing clip -Arrow A- and pry down the right front cover plate -2- along the direction of -Arrow B-.

3. Disengage the connecting plug -2- of evaporator temperature sensor. 4. Take out the evaporator temperature sensor -1- by rotating in the direction of -Arrow-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

9. Distribution System 9.1 Removal and installation of front defroster air duct Removal

1. Remove the instrument panel=>Vehicle body and painting; Repair group:82; Instrument panel; Removal and installation of instrument panel.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

343

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Pry out the fixing clips on the left and right sides-Arrow A-. 3. Take out the front defroster air duct -1- in the direction of -Arrow B-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

9.2 Removal and installation of the center air vent duct Removal

1. Remove the instrument panel=>Vehicle body and painting; Repair group:82; Instrument panel; Removal and installation of instrument panel.

2. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow-.

344

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm 3. Remove the side air vent duct. Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

9.3 Removal and installation of rear air duct The rear feet-blowing air duct is available to the high configuration vehicle model only. Removal Tips To just remove the lower rear air duct of the seat, there is no need to remove the instrument panel but the auxiliary instrument panel underframe.

1. Remove the front seat=>Vehicle body and painting; Repair group:89; Seat:Removal and installation of seat. 2. Remove the auxiliary instrument panel underframe=>Vehicle body and painting; Repair group:84; Interior equipment; Removal and installation of auxiliary instrument panel underframe. 3. Remove the left A-pillar lower trim panel=>Vehicle body and painting; Repair group:84; Interior equipment; Removal and installation of A-pillar lower trim panel. 4. Lift up the front carpet.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

345

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow C-. Screw -Arrow C - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm 6. Pry out fixing clip -Arrow B- of the rear air duct with tools. 7. Remove the rear air duct from the heater evaporator assembly in the direction of -Arrow A-. Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Tips Check all the fixing clips and replace if necessary.

9.4 Removal and installation of air conditioning air filter element Removal Tips Air conditioning air filter element is located above the footwell on the front passenger side.

346

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

1. Disengage the fixing clip and remove the air conditioning air filter cover -1-.

2. Remove the A/C air filter element -1-.

Tips Pay attention to the regulations on disposal! Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: When installing, place the air conditioning air filter element -1- with the arrow pointing to the driver's side

Repair Group 73- A/C System

347

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

9.5 Removal and installation of side air vent Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

Plastic skid plate

Removal 1. Pry out side vent assemblies -1- and-2- at the position of -Arrow- with tools.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

9.6 Removal and installation of center vent Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

348

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Plastic skid plate

Removal 1. Pry out the center vent assembly -1- at the position of -Arrow- with tools.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

9.7 Removal and installation of the defrost cover plate Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

Plastic skid plate

Repair Group 73- A/C System

349

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Removal 1. Pry down the left defrost cover plate -1- and right defrost cover plate -2- from the instrument panel body with tools.

2. Pry down the front defrost cover plate -1- from the instrument panel body with tools.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

350

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

9.8 Ventilation grille



Tips Extra air will escape from the ventilation grille behind the trunk trim panel.



Do not cover up the vent in order to ventilate normally.



The ventilation grille frame is positioned in the side panel of the rear bumper zone.

9.8.1 Inspection of ventilation grille

 

Tips Ventilation grille can be checked from the inside of the trunk. Remove the additional parts according to the vehicle equipment.

1. Remove the wheel cover trim panel=> Vehicle Body and Painting; Repair group:84; Interior equipment; Removal and installation of wheel cover trim panel. 2. The sealing lips of the ventilation device on the two sides of the vehicle must move freely and close automatically, or it may be damaged.

9.8.2 Removal and installation of ventilation grille Removal

1. Remove the rear bumper panel=>Vehicle Body and Painting; Repair Group:83; Exterior equipment; Removal and installation of rear bumper panel. 2. Remove the ventilation grille unit -1- from the side panel. Tips If necessary, remove the wheel cover trim panel and release the fixing clip of the ventilation unit from the inside of trunk.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

351

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

10 Pipeline System 10.1 Brief introduction Note 

Repair the air conditioning system pipeline only after discharging the refrigerant completely.



Refrigerant discharging is required to use special equipment.



Wear goggles and gloves when discharging refrigerant.



Keep the working area of ventilation and turn on the workshop exhaust system.



Seal immediately the air conditioning refrigeration system pipeline once it is opened to prevent from moisture and dirt.



The sealing ring of air conditioning refrigeration system pipeline is a disposable part that must be replaced after removal and dipped in the refrigerant oil before installation.



When installing air conditioning pipeline, compressor, condenser and evaporator, connect them to the system upon removal of the sealing plug for fear of entry of moisture and dust

Various part assemblies of air conditioning system are installed in various parts of the vehicle.The air conditioning pipes connect these part assemblies together and seal them to form a complete air conditioning system. If the compressor is the heart of the air conditioning refrigerant system, then the air conditioning pipeline is the blood vessels of the system, transferring refrigerant in different states. R-134a refrigerant is used in the air conditioning system of this model. Classification of air conditioning pipeline 

Classified based on pressure

−

High-pressure pipe

The pipe starting from compressor via condenser to expansion valve. −

Low-pressure pipe

The pipe starting from expansion valve via evaporator to compressor. 

Classified based on the state of refrigerant

−

Gas pipe

The refrigerant in the pipeline is in a gas state. −

Liquid pipe

The refrigerant in the pipeline is in a liquid state. Air conditioning pipeline system is used for transferring refrigerant among different parts of the air conditioning system. R-134a air conditioning pipeline equipped in the vehicle is composed of a Nylon hose sandwiched between the rubber layers. This type of Nylon hose is easy for loading R-134a refrigerant, with the molecular structure smaller than P-12. Ends of the refrigerant hoses are made of aluminum or steel, with brass connectors commonly used. Twist or bend of the pipeline system may weaken the performance of the whole air conditioning system, and reduce refrigerant flow in the system. All the bending radius of flexible hoses should be at least 10 times of the ose diameter, the refrigerant hose must be kept 80 mm (3 inches) away from the exhaust manifold and exhaust pipe.

352

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

10.2 Overview of piping system

1 - Low-pressure hose assembly

2 - High-pressure service interface valve





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 375

3- Low-pressure service interface valve

4





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 386

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 386 - Low-pressure pipe assembly

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 374

5 - High-pressure pipe assembly

6 - High-pressure pipe assembly 2-.



Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 378



7-

Compressor

8 - Receiver-drier



Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 355



Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 378 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 363

9 - Evaporator

10 - Expansion valve





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 363

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 382

11 - Condenser

12 - Engine oil pressure switch





Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 363

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 341

Repair Group 73- A/C System

353

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

13 - High-pressure hose assembly 

Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 377

10.3 Air conditioning compressor 10.3.1 Overview There is identification mark of R-134a refrigerant on the compressor. How It Works Air conditioning compressor The engine will drive the compressor through the electronic clutch, drive pulley and drive belt. The air conditioning compressor can be lubricated with refrigerant oil, with the refrigerant oil and the refrigerant circulating in the refrigeration system. The air conditioning compressor will absorb the low pressure refrigerant vapor from the evaporator through air intake. It then compresses refrigerant into refrigerant vapor with high pressure and high temperature.Afterwards, it pumps the vapor into the condenser through compressor discharge hole. The compressor can not be repaired. If fault or damage occurs, replace the entire compressor assembly. The compressor clutch, pulley and bearing assembly as well as the clutch excitation coil can be repaired. High-pressure relief valve The high-pressure relief valve is located on the compressor cylinder head, which is located at the back of the air conditioning compressor. This mechanical valve is used for discharging refrigerant from the air conditioning system, to avoid damage to the compressor and other parts of refrigeration system caused by condenser airflow blockage or excessive filling of refrigerant. When the discharge pressure reaches 4.0±0.4MPA or higher, the high-pressure relief valve will enable the system to relief the pressure. When the discharge pressure reaches to its minimum value of 3.25MPA, the high-pressure relief valve will be shut off. Proper amount of refrigerant will be discharged by the high-pressure relief valve to reduce the system pressure, then the high-pressure relief valve will reset. Most of the refrigerant will be stored in the air conditioning system. The refrigerant discharged from the high-pressure relief valve does not indicate that there is fault with the valve. The high-pressure relief valve is a factory calibration device. It can not be adjusted, repaired, or removed; otherwise, it will be affected, and the valve can only be repaired as a part of the compressor assembly.

10.3.2 Installation Suggestions for Air Conditioning Compressor Important notice: Precautions: The symmetry plane of corresponding grooves of compressor electromagnetic clutch pulley and engine crankshaft pulley must coincide, with an error not exceeding 20'. No air or water enters into the system while installing the air conditioning compressor. Pay attention to the refrigerant oil quantity in the air conditioning system; if the filling quantity exceeds the standard, refill in accordance with 150g (oil)/1000g (refrigerant).Fill the lost quantity after repairing the air conditioning pipe due to burst or leak.

354

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

When filling the refrigerant oil in the air conditioning compressor, fill according to the specification (PAG56 refrigerant oil) on the compressor nameplate. Do not mix it with different refrigerant oil. Our company can provide the above-mentioned refrigerant oil to customers. The scroll series of compressors are well-suited for environmental friendly refrigerant R134a. Counterfeit R-134a refrigerant may cause irreparable damage to the compressor. During installation, the inlet and outlet joints of the pipeline should be consistent with the S and D ports of the compressor. Ensure that the compressor runs along the direction indicated on the nameplate (clockwise viewed from the clutch). Do not refill the liquid refrigerant from the low pressure side of the compressor,or it may damage the compressor components. Do not fill excessive refrigerant, or it may cause compressor bearing fault and air conditioning system fault. While connecting the pipe, apply a little refrigerant oil on the O-shaped seal ring and tighten the connector. As for the removal and installation of threaded connector of the pipeline, use two wrenches.One is for fixing the external threaded connector, and the other for tightening the nut. Adjustment of drive belt: 

After installation, apply a force of 100N to the belt in the position of -Arrow-.Measure to check whether the belt deformation is within the standard deviation range . Standard deviation -a-: 10.9～16.5mm



Start the engine and check the belt running.

10.3.3 Removal and installation of compressor assembly Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

Torque wrench

Repair Group 73- A/C System

355

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine

The refrigerant must be used to flush the refrigerant circulation circuit under the following conditions: 

There is dirt or other impurities in the refrigerant circulation circuit.



When the sealing refrigerant circulation circuit is drained, the vacuum display is not stable (there is water in the refrigerant circulation circuit which generates pressure).



The time that the refrigerant circulation circuit is open exceeds the normal assembly time (e.g. after an accident).



It can be assumed that there is water in the refrigerant circulation circuit based on the pressure and temperature in the refrigerant circulation circuit.



The amount of refrigerant oil in the refrigerant circulation circuit is not clear.



The A/C compressor must be replaced due to internal damage (e.g. noise or no power).

Removal 1. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group: 01: General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant.

2. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7. 3. Remove lower panel of the front bumper. =>Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment; Removal and installation of the front bumper lower panel. 4. Remove the right front wheel cover fender. => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment; Removal and installation of the front wheel cover fender. 5. Unscrew the fixing bolt of the generator -Arrow B-, and then press the belt regulating bolt counterclockwise -Arrow A-. Bolt -Arrow A- specification:M8×1.25×80 Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 4 - 6 Nm Bolt -Arrow A- tool: 12mm hexagon sleeve Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications：M8×1.25×40 Bolt

-Arrow B- tightening torque: 19 - 25 Nm

Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 12mm hexagon sleeve

6. Push the generator towards the engine to the limit position, and disengage the A/C compressor belt.

356

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

7. Disconnect the connecting plug-1- of the compressor. 8. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow- and disengage refrigerant pipeline -2on the A/C compressor. Bolt -Arrow- specification: M8×1.25×30 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 22 - 30 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

10. Unscrew 4 fixing bolts -3- of the compressor assembly and remove the compressor assembly. Bolt -3- specification: M8×1.25×100 Bolt -3- tightening torque: 22 - 30 Nm Bolt -3- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Repair Group 73- A/C System

357

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Tips 

When the A/C compressor is stuck, disengage the overload protection device from the A/C compressor shaft. In most cases, it can be determined whether the A/C compressor is stuck through the bulge on the multi-wedge belt. In addition, it can be determined whether the compressor is stuck through the abrasion of rubber on the multi-wedge belt.



To prevent the compressor from being damaged when draining the refrigerant circulation circuit, the compressor is equipped with a secure oil supply system:40～50cm³of refrigerant oil is left in the A/C compressor.



The engine cannot be started until the refrigerant circulation circuit has been assembled as required. For example, if the refrigerant piping is not connected with the A/C compressor, the compressor will run along with the running engine, thus heat will be generated due to internal friction, and result in damage to the compressor.



When there is no refrigerant in the refrigerant circulation circuit, then the A/C compressor control valve cannot be started.Thus the A/C compressor will start idle running with the engine.



If the engine should be started when the refrigerant circulation circuit is drained, then:

a. Refrigerant circulation circuit must be assembled completely. b. 1/4 of the amount of refrigerant in refrigerant circulation circuit must be left in A/C compressor. c. Engine speed must not exceed 2000rpm. d. When the engine has to run, it can not run more than 10 minutes.

10.3.4 Compressor clutch The air conditioning compressor clutch assembly is composed of excitation coil of fixed electromagnetic clutch, as well as transmission wheel bearings and drive wheel assembly, clutch plate and gasket. Compressor clutch adopts the method of electrical engagement and separation for the drive belt of compressor and engine parts. The excitation coil of clutch and drive wheel bearings as well as drive wheel assembly are all fixed on the top of the compressor with retainers. The clutch plate is connected to the compressor shaft by keys and fixed by nuts.

358

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

10.3.5 Removal and installation of compressor clutch Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

T41137301-Fixing wrench of compressor pulley

T61137301-Removal tool of compressor pulley

T61137302-Installation tool of compressor pulley

Removal 1. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine.

2. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 355. 3. Remove front bumper lower panel => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment; Removal and installation of the front bumper lower panel. 4. Remove front wheel cover fender => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment; Removal and installation of the front wheel cover fender. 5. Unscrew the fixing bolt of the generator -Arrow B-, and then press the belt regulating bolt counterclockwise -Arrow A-. Bolt -Arrow A- specification:M8×1.25×80 Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 4 - 6 Nm Bolt -Arrow A- tool: 12mm hexagon sleeve Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications：M8×1.25×40 Bolt

-Arrow B- tightening torque: 19 - 25 Nm

Repair Group 73- A/C System

359

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 12mm hexagon sleeve 6. Push the generator towards the engine to the limit position, and disengage the A/C compressor belt. 7. Fix the clutch disc -1- with the compressor pulley fixing wrench T41137301-, and remove the fixing nut -Arrow-. Nut - Arrow- specification：M8×1.25 Nut -Arrow- tightening torque: 18 Nm Bolt -Arrow - tool: 13mm hexagon sleeve

Note 

Do not pry between the clutch disc and the driving wheel when removing the clutch disc from the clutch shaft, or else it will damage the clutch disc.



Be careful not to lose any clutch pad during the removal of the clutch, because the pads may be used during the installation of the clutch disc.

8. Gently tab the clutch disc -3- and disconnect it from the spline on the compressor shaft -1-, and remove the clutch disc -3- and the pad -2- on the compressor shaft.

360

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

9. Remove the fixing clamp -2- which fixes the compressor clutch driving wheel and the bearing assembly -1-.

10. As shown in the figure: extract the compressor clutch driving wheel and the bearing assembly-1- in the direction of -Arrow- using the puller and the removal tool of the compressor pulley -T61137301-.

11. Remove harness fixing screw -Arrow- of the clutch excitation coil -2- and disengage the harness connector. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 3 - 4 Nm 12. Remove the the fixing clamp -1- of the clutch excitation coil -2-, and remove the clutch excitation coil -2-.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Note The pad may be compressed after tightening the nut.Check whether the air gaps on 4 positions or more are still correct, and rotate the driving wheel before checking the air gap for the last time. If the air gap can not meet the requirement, please add or reduce the pad as needed, until the air gap can meet the requirement.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

361

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

1. Align the positioning pin -Arrow A- at the back of the clutch excitation coil -1- with the slot -Arrow B- on the compressor front cover, and then locate the excitation coil on the compressor to determine the correct orientation and wiring layout of the clutch excitation coil. so as to prevent the wiring harness from being sandwiched between the compressor front cover and the clutch excitation coil.

Note 

If a snap ring is not located in slot, then it must have been vibrated out, thus causing the clutch fault and severe damage to the compressor.



A new snap ring must be used to fix the clutch excitation coil on the A/C compressor, with the slope of the snap ring outward.

2. Install fixing clamp -1- of the clutch excitation coil -2-. 3. Tighten fixing screw -Arrow- of the clutch harness and install the connecting plug of the clutch coil wire.

Note Do not damage the driving wheel friction surface when installing the driving wheel and the bearing, or else it may cause premature fault of the clutch. 4. Use compressor pulley installation tools- T61137302-to install driving wheel and bearing assembly -1- on the front cover of compressor. 5. Install the external snap ring to fix the driving wheel and bearing assembly to the front cover of compressor housing, to make sure that the snap ring is located properly in the slot in place.

362

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6. If previous clutch disc -3-, driving wheel and bearing assembly are re-used, then the old pad -2- can be installed on the compressor shaft -1near the shaft shoulder.If new clutch disc, driving wheel and bearing assembly are used, then install a trial pad with the size of 0.3/0.4/0.5 mm on the shaft shoulder.

10.3.6 Inspection of compressor clutch disc 1. Check whether the friction surface of the drive wheel and clutch disc -3- are worn.If there is excessive wear or scratch, replace the drive wheel and the clutch disc. 2 .If refrigerant oil is stuck on the friction surface, check whether there is refrigerant oil on compressor shaft-1- and head parts. 3. If refrigerant oil is found, then oil leaks from the oil seal of the compressor shaft.Replace the compressor. 4. Check whether drive wheel bearings of clutch are rugged or leaky seriously.Replace the drive wheel and the bearing assembly if necessary.

10.3.7 Compressor clutch plate run-in After the installation of a new compressor clutch, the clutch should be circulated 20 times (engaging for 5 seconds and disengaging for 5 seconds).During this period, set the air conditioning controller on Cycle Mode with the blower motor at its maximum speed. With the engine speed of 1500～2000r/min, this process (run-in)will get the relative friction surface running-ins and provide high compressor clutch torque.

10.4 Removal and installation of condenser Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

Repair Group 73- A/C System

363

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Torque wrench

Air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge

Removal Tips 

Replace all the sealing rings on the refrigerant pipeline every time when the pipe is removed.



After removing the refrigerant circulation pipeline, pay attention to sealing the air conditioning circulation with seal plug.

1. Turn off the ignition and all the electrical equipment, and remove the ignition key. 2. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group: 01: General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant. Tips It is illegal to discharge the refrigerant into the surrounding environment.

3. Remove the front bumper component=>Vehicle Body and Painting; Repair Group:83; Exterior equipment; Removal and installation of front bumper component.

364

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the hood lock assembly and disengage the fixing clip bracket -1- from the harness.

5. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow B- of refrigerant pipeline bracket. Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications：M6×1.0×15 Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque:6±10 Nm Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve 6. Unscrew the fixing nut -Arrow A- of refrigerant pipeline and disengage the refrigerant pipeline connector -1-. Nut -Arrow A- specification：M6×1.0 Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 6 - 12 Nm Nut -Arrow A- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

7. Unscrew the fixing nut of the refrigerant pipe -Arrow-, and disengage the refrigerant pipe connector -1- from the joint of condenser. Bolt - Arrow - Specifications：M6×1.0×15 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 6 - 12 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 8mm hexagon sleeve

Repair Group 73- A/C System

365

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

8. Unscrew the bolt -Arrow A- and remove the bracket -1-. Bolt - Arrow A - Specifications：M6×1.0×12 Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 6 - 12 Nm Bolt -Arrow A- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve Unscrew the fixing bolt –Arrow B- connecting the condenser with the radiator, and remove the condenser 2. Bolt - Arrow - Specifications：M6×1.0×15 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 8mm hexagon sleeve

Tips To prevent the condenser blade damage, pay attention to avoid the sharp parts when removing the condenser. Seal all the opened refrigerant circuit components with suitable sealing cover to prevent air or other impurities from entering. Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Tips 

Fill the refrigerant with a refrigerant charge and discharge machine.



Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

10.5 Removal and installation of heater core Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

366

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Hose clamp

Clamp

Removal

Note 

As there is pressure in the cooling system, release the pressure and reduce the temperature as needed before repairing.



When the engine is warming up, the coolant temperature may exceed 100 ℃, so there is danger of scald.Conduct the repair work after the engine cools down.



Put a towel on the front passenger carpet to collect the flowing coolant

Removal 1. Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

367

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Fix the coolant hoses -1- and -2- with the hose clamp, release the coolant hoses clamp -Arrow- with clamp tool, and disengage the heater core and the coolant hoses -1- and -2-.

3. Insert the pneumatic gun -A- into the coolant pipe on the side of heater core. 4. Put a container -B- with scales on the other side of the coolant pipe -C-. 5. Blow the coolant in the heater core into container -B- with the pneumatic gun, and discharge the coolant as much as possible. Tips Remove the heater core from the driver’s foot area under the instrument panel at the right side. 

Remove fixing bracket of the heater core right harness.

6. Loosen the bolt -Arrow- and remove the pipeline clamp -1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm 7. Disengage the pipeline from the heater core. 8. Remove the heater core from the heater evaporator housing.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: 1. Check whether the heating device housing is clean after removing the heater core. 2. If necessary, remove the residues or stains of coolant spilled out from the heating device housing. 3. Insert the heater core into heating device housing.

368

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4. It is necessary to soak the sealing ring -1- of the pipeline interface with coolant before installation. Tips Replace the sealing ring -1- after each removal.

5. Connect the heater core with the coolant pipe. 6. Install the clamp -1-, which should be able to rotate easily on coolant pipe and tighten the fixing bolt -Arrow-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm

 

Tips Replace the clamp if it is deformed. Check the position of clamp -1- after tightening the bolt.The clamp should envelop the heater core and the flange on the coolant pipe securely.



Tips Replace all the sealing rings.



Fill the coolant to the standard level.



Check whether the coolant circulation system is sealed, and particularly pay attention to the connection between coolant pipe and heater core.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

369

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

10.6 Removal and installation of evaporation core Removal

1. Remove heater evaporator assembly=> Refer to page 325. 2. Disengage the connection between heater evaporator -1- and air intake chamber -2- from the area of joint part -Arrow A-. Tips Pay attention to the positioning pin -Arrow B- when disengaging the connection between heater evaporator-1- and air intake chamber -2-.

3. Pry out the fixing clips on the left and right sides-Arrow A-. 4. Take out the front defroster air duct -1- in the direction of -Arrow B-.

5. Unscrew the screw -Arrow- and remove the harness bracket -1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

370

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow A- on the blower motor. Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 0.7 - 1.1 Nm 7. Rotate the blower motor in the direction of -Arrow B- slightly, and remove the blower motor -1- from the heater evaporator assembly housing. 8. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow C- and remove the speed control module -2-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

9. Loosen the screw -Arrow- and remove the pipeline clamp-1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

10. Loosen the bolt -Arrow- and disengage the pipeline connecting clamp-1-. Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm 11. Disengage the pipeline from the heater core.

12. Remove the heater core -1- from the heater evaporator housing. 13. Take out the evaporator temperature sensor -2- by rotating in the direction of -Arrow-.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

371

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

14. Pry up the fixing clip -Arrow- and remove the cover plate -1-.

15. Unscrew the screw -Arrow A-. Screw -Arrow A- tightening torque:2±3 Nm 16. Pry down the fixing clip -Arrow B- and remove the lower housing -1- of the heater evaporator.

372

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

17. Pry down the fixing clip -Arrow A- and unscrew the screw -Arrow B-. Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm 18. Disengage heater evaporator left housing -1- and heater evaporator right housing -2-. Tips Tip: pay attention to the locking clip at the fixing position of the screw when disengaging heater evaporator left housing and heater evaporator right housing. 19. Remove the evaporator core -3-. Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

373

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

10.7 Removal and installation of low-pressure pipe Removal Tips In order to better display the layout of air conditioning pipeline in a real vehicle, the figure just shows the route of the air conditioning pipeline.

1. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group: 01: General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant.

2. Disengage the corresponding fixing clip. 3. Remove the pressure plate bolt -Arrow A-, and remove the pressure plate. Bolt - Arrow A - Specifications：M6×1.0×30 Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm Bolt -Arrow A- tool: 8mm hexagon sleeve 4. Unscrew the low-pressure pipe connector nut -Arrow B-. Nut -Arrow B- tightening torque: 22 - 25 Nm Nut -Arrow B-Tool: 27mm open wrench

374

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Tips Nut -Arrow B-Tool fixing tool in removal: 24mm open wrench 5. Remove the low-pressure pipe -1-.

 

Tips Replace all the sealing rings on the refrigerant pipeline every time when the pipe is removed. After removing the refrigerant circulation pipeline, pay attention to sealing the air conditioning circulation with seal plug.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

 

Tips Fill the refrigerant with a refrigerant charge and discharge machine. Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

10.8 Removal and installation of low-pressure hose Removal Tips In order to better display the layout of air conditioning pipeline in a real vehicle, the figure just shows the route of the air conditioning pipeline.

1. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group: 01: General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

375

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Unscrew the low-pressure pipe connector nut -Arrow A-. Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 22 - 25 Nm Nut -Arrow A-Tool: 27mm open wrench Tips Nut -Arrow A-Tool fixing tool in removal: 24mm open wrench 3. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow B- that secures the compressor and the pipe. Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications：M8×1.25×30 Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque: 25 - 30 Nm Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve 4. Remove the low-pressure hose -1-.



Tips Replace all the sealing rings on the refrigerant pipeline every time when the pipe is removed.



After removing the refrigerant circulation pipeline, pay attention to sealing the air conditioning circulation with seal plug.

376

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

 

Tips Fill the refrigerant with a refrigerant charge and discharge machine. Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

10.9 Removal and installation of high-pressure hose Removal Tips In order to better display the layout of air conditioning pipeline in a real vehicle, the figure just shows the route of the air conditioning pipeline.

1. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group: 01: General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant.

2. Unscrew the nut -Arrow A- connecting the high-pressure hose with the condenser and disengage the high-pressure hose from the condenser. Nut -Arrow A- specification：M6×1.0

Repair Group 73- A/C System

377

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 6 - 12 Nm Nut -Arrow A- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve 3. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow B- that secures the compressor and the pipe. Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications：M8×1.25×30 Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque: 25 - 30 Nm Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve 4. Remove the high-pressure hose. Tips  Replace all the sealing rings on the refrigerant pipeline every time when the pipe is removed. 

After removing the refrigerant circulation pipeline, pay attention to sealing the air conditioning circulation with seal plug.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:



Tips Fill the refrigerant with a refrigerant charge and discharge machine.



Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

10.10 Removal and installation of high-pressure pipe High-pressure pipe assembly 1 Removal Tips In order to better display the layout of air conditioning pipeline in a real vehicle, the figure just shows the route of the air conditioning pipeline. 1. Turn off the ignition and all the electrical equipment, and remove the ignition key.

2. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group: 01: General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant.

378

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. Disengage the corresponding fixing clip. 4. Remove the pressure plate bolt -Arrow B- and remove the pressure plate. Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications：M6×1.0×30 Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque:6～9 Nm Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 8mm hexagon sleeve 5. Unscrew the high-pressure pipe connector nut -Arrow A-. Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 12 - 17 Nm Nut -Arrow A-Tool: 19mm open wrench Tips Nut -Arrow A-Tool fixing tool in removal: 17mm open wrench 6. Disconnect the pressure switch connecting plug. 7. Remove the high-pressure pipe assembly -1-.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

379

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Tips  Replace all the sealing rings on the refrigerant pipeline every time when the pipe is removed. 

After removing the refrigerant circulation pipeline, pay attention to sealing the air conditioning circulation with seal plug.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Tips  Fill the refrigerant with a refrigerant charge and discharge machine. 

Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

High-pressure pipe assembly 2 Removal Tips In order to better display the layout of air conditioning pipeline in a real vehicle, the figure just shows the route of the air conditioning pipeline.

1. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group: 01: General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant. 2. Remove the retaining buckle -Arrow A- of the front bumper lower protective panel, unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow B- and remove the front bumper lower protective panel -1-. Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications：M6×1.0×16 Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque:8±12 Nm Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

380

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Unscrew nut -Arrow A- of the high-pressure pipe assembly. Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 12 - 17 Nm Nut -Arrow A-Tool: 19mm open wrench Tips Nut -Arrow A-Tool fixing tool in removal: 17mm open wrench 4. Unscrew the bolt -Arrow B-. Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications：M6×1.0×30 Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque:9～12 Nm Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve 5. Remove the high-pressure pipe assembly -1-.

 

Tips Replace all the sealing rings on the refrigerant pipeline every time when the pipe is removed. After removing the refrigerant circulation pipeline, pay attention to sealing the air conditioning circulation with seal plug.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

381

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:



Tips Fill the refrigerant with a refrigerant charge and discharge machine.



Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

10.11 Removal and installation of expansion valve Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

Torque wrench

Air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge

Removal



Tips Replace all the sealing rings on the refrigerant pipeline every time when the pipe is removed.



After removing the refrigerant circulation pipeline, pay attention to sealing the air conditioning circulation with seal plug.

1. Turn off the ignition and all the electrical equipment, and remove the ignition key.

382

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group: 01: General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant. 3. Unscrew the bolt -Arrow-, remove the pressure plate-2- and pull out the refrigerant pipe -1-. Bolt - Arrow - Specifications：M6×1.0×30 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 8mm hexagon sleeve

4. Unscrew the expansion valve screw -Arrow-, and remove the expansion valve -2- together with the seal sponge -1-. Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 6 - 7 Nm

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Tips  Fill the refrigerant with a refrigerant charge and discharge machine. 

Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

10.12 Air conditioning receiver-drier Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

Repair Group 73- A/C System

383

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Torque wrench

Air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine

Removal 

Tips There is no need to remove the front bumper component for the removal of the air conditioning receiver-drier. In order to achieve a better visual effect, the figure has not drawn the front bumper component.



Replace all the sealing rings on the refrigerant pipeline every time when the pipe is removed.



After removing the refrigerant circulation pipeline, pay attention to sealing the air conditioning circulation with seal plug.

1. Turn off the ignition and all the electrical equipment, and remove the ignition key.

2. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group: 01: General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant. 3. Remove the front bumper component=>Vehicle Body and Painting; Repair Group:83; Exterior equipment; Removal and installation of front bumper component.

384

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

4. Unscrew the plug screw -3-. Bolt -3- tightening torque :20±25 Nm Plug screw -3-Tool: 10mm hexagon screwdriver sleeve 5. Take out the filter screen -1- and the sealing ring -2-, and pull the air conditioning receiver-drier downwards until it comes out. Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

 

Tips Fill the refrigerant with a refrigerant charge and discharge machine. Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

385

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

10.13 Service interface valve core 10.13.1 Brief introduction The refrigeration system service interface can be used for vacuuming, filling and testing the air conditioning refrigeration system. The protective cap can be helpful for the sealing of the service interface and preventing the refrigeration system from being polluted. Remember to reinstall the protective cap on the service interface after completing the maintenance of the refrigeration system. Use connectors of different outer diameters for the high- and low-voltage ends, to ensure not to confuse the connectors for service interface. 1. Service interface 2. Service interface valve core 3. Service interface protective cap

The protective cap can be helpful for the sealing of the service interface and preventing the refrigeration system from being polluted. Remember to reinstall the protective cap on the service interface after completing the maintenance of the refrigeration system. Upon delivery, each service interface is equipped with a plastic protection cap with thread.The protection cap of service interface is a maintainable item.

10.13.2 Removal and installation of service interface valve core Removal Danger Please refer to relevant warnings and notes of this system before repair work. Failure to observe the warnings and notes may result in death or serious personal injury.

386

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

1. Remove the protective cap -1- on the service interface -2-.

2. Recycle the refrigerant in the refrigeration system=>Refer to Page 388 . 3. Remove the valve core -3- on the service interface with the service interface adapter component. 4.Use plug or adhesive tape on the open-mouthed service interface.

Tips After removing the refrigerant circulation pipeline, pay attention to sealing the air conditioning circulation with seal plug. Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following: Tips  Lubricate the valve core with refrigerant oil before installation. 

Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

11 Inspection of Condensate Water Discharge Hose



Check whether the condensate water discharge hose -1- ages and cracks and if aged, replace the condensate water discharge hose.



Check whether the condensate water discharge hose -1- is blocked by impurities and if blocked, clean the condensate water discharge hose.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

387

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

12 Refrigerant 12.1 Refrigerant recovery Recover the refrigerant with a refrigerant charge and discharge machine. For correct maintenance and usage of the equipment, please refer to the instruction manual provided by the equipment manufacturer.

Air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge

If the following conditions occur, do not use the recovered refrigerant: 

Compressor damaged (external leakage and external damage).



Black or viscous material is found in the refrigerant.



Unable to determine the type of refrigerant.

Tips 

Take necessary actions for personal safety protection when carrying out relevant maintenance on the refrigerant, and avoid touching or inhaling the refrigerant.



A container with refrigerant should be stored in a cool place.Do not place it in sunlight or at a high temperature to prevent it from expanding and bursting.



Refrigerant and refrigerant oil must be stored as required and protected from mixing with water or other impurities in the air.

12.2 Refrigeration system vacuum Note Particularly effective methods must be adopted to prevent the water from leaking into the refrigerant oil of air conditioning system. It is difficult to remove water from the refrigerant oil and the reliability of the compressor may be problematic. If the air conditioning compressor which uses HFC-134a refrigerant is exposed to the atmosphere for a long time, it is advisable to discharge the original refrigerant oil and replace it with new oil or use a new air conditioning compressor. In this way, pollution of the refrigeration system can be eliminated. If the refrigerant is exposed to the atmosphere, the system must be vacuumed before refilling. Mixing of water, air and refrigerant will make the pressure of compressor head rise to exceed the normal range. This will affect the system performance and damage the air conditioning compressor. Check whether the connector valve is tightened when connecting the device connector to the pipe connector.

1. Recycling of refrigerant=> Refer to page 388.

388

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

2. Connect the suitable filling device, the refrigerant recovery machine or the refrigerant recovery unit and the manifold gauge set with a vacuum pump. 3. Open the air suction valve and discharge valve, and start the vacuum pump. Run the vacuum pump for at least 45 minutes before refilling to remove the water in the system. When the readings of vacuum degree on the suction gauge stay at 88 kpa (26-inch mercury column) or higher for 30 minutes, cut off the valve and turn off the vacuum pump. If the vacuum of refrigeration system cannot reach to the specified value, the system may be leaky and must be repaired. If the refrigeration system can stay at the specified vacuum degree for at least 30 minutes, start the vacuum pump and open the suction valve and discharge valve.Afterwards, vacuum the system for 10 minutes. 4. Close all the valves, turn off and disconnect the vacuum pump.

5. Filling of refrigeration system => Refer to page 389.

12.3 Refrigerant filling Danger Please refer to relevant warnings and notes of this system before repair work. Failure to observe the warnings and notes may result in death or serious personal injury. Note NOTE:Always refer to the HVAC Specification Label under the hood for the refrigerant filling specification of the vehicle concerned. After all the refrigeration system leaks have been repaired, vacuum the system and fill with refrigerant. For the proper filling quantity of the refrigerant, please refer to the HVAC Specification Label under the hood. Use the HFC-134a refrigerant charge and discharge machine that meets the SAE Standard J2210 to charge the system with HFC-134a refrigerant. For correct maintenance and usage of the equipment, please refer to the instruction manual provided by the equipment manufacturer. Note A small amount of refrigerant oil is removed from the air conditioning system each time the refrigeration system is recovered and vacuumed. Before charging the air conditioning system, compensate the refrigerant oil lost during the recovery process. Refer to the equipment manufacturer instructions for more information.

1. Discharge the refrigeration system=>Refer to Page 388. 2. Connect the manifold gauge set and the HFC-134a refrigerant charge and discharge machine that meets the SAE standard J2210 to the refrigeration system. 3. Measure the proper amount of refrigerant and heat it to 52°C with suitable equipment. For correct maintenance and usage of the equipment, please refer to the instruction manual provided by the equipment manufacturer. 4. Open the suction and the discharge valves, and then the filling valve, and the heated refrigerant will flow into the system. 5. When the transmission of refrigerant stops, close the suction and the discharge valves. 6. If all the filled refrigerant cannot be transmitted from the distribution device, turn on all the switches of windows and air conditioning controller, so that the compressor will engage and set the blower motor to the lowest speed. Run the engine at a steadily high idle speed (1400 r/min). If the air conditioning compressor does not engage, check the compressor control circuit and repair as required. 7. Open the valve on the low-pressure side to transfer the remaining refrigerant to the refrigeration system. Danger Take care not to open the discharge valve (high-pressure side) when filling. Failure to follow the warning may result in possible personal injury or death. 8. Disconnect the filling equipment and manifold gauge set from the refrigeration system service port.

Repair Group 73- A/C System

389

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

9 .Install the protective cap onto the refrigeration system service port.

13 Filling Quantity 13.1 Air conditioning refrigerant Air conditioning compressor

Total filling quantity

Scroll type air conditioning compressor

500g

13.2 Air conditioning refrigerant oil Tips 

Refrigerant model: HFC-134a. Never use the refrigerant oil of different brands.



Do not use the air conditioning refrigerant oil stored in a container that has been opened for a long time.

Important information: As the air conditioning refrigerant oil has a strong water absorption capacity, the container shall be sealed immediately once opened to prevent water from penetrating. Do not dispose of air conditioning refrigerant oil with engine oil or transmission oil due to its chemical properties. Distribution of air conditioning refrigerant oil Before starting the air conditioner, the refrigerant oil within the bottom case of air conditioning compressor should be distributed in the refrigerant circulation circuit: 

Air conditioning compressor: about 50%



Condenser: about 10%



Inlet hose: about 10%



Evaporator: about 20%



Air conditioning receiver-drier: about 10%

390

Repair Group 73- A/C System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

74 Network Communication System 1 Brief introduction The vehicle wiring harness is divided into three data buses CAN, LIN and K-line. The bus line connects the control units in the form of a network to transmit commands and information. The body controller provides a channel for data transmission and exchange of CAN bus and LIN bus. The K-line is used for diagnostic communication between the exterior test unit and the on-board ECU.Initialization can also be established before communication through the K-line. The control units connected on the same bus adopt the same communication protocol (format) and baud rate (transmission speed) to transfer information.

2 Technical parameters Transmission rate Name

Transmission rate (Kbit/s)

CAN data bus

125–500Kbit/s

Repair Group 74 - Network Communication System

391

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3 Overview of network communication system

1-

Airbag controller

2 - DA machine/AVN navigation

3-

A/C controller

4 - CAN bus (low speed)

5 - Instrument cluster

6-

7-

8 - Intelligent battery sensor

Engine control unit

ABS controller

9 - Diagnose plug

10 - Body controller

11 - CAN bus (high speed)

12 - Electronic assistance

13 -

14 - Steering angle sensor

Automatic transmission control unit

15 - LIN bus

16 - Rain/light sensor

4 CAN bus system Introduction CAN is the abbreviation of Controller Area Network. CAN bus is a type of communication protocol developed for data exchange among various control units and testing, diagnosis and feedback display equipment of the vehicle. As a type of multi-master bus, CAN bus can support the communication network in distributed real-time control, with a communication medium of twisted pair, coaxial cable or optical fiber. Features

392

Repair Group 74 - Network Communication System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

1. CAN bus works in a way of multi-master, any node on the network can actively send information to other nodes on the network at any time, regardless of master or slave, with flexible communication modes.Node information like the address is not needed. 2. Node information on N network of CAN bus can be divided into different priorities, which can meet different real-time requirements.Data at the high priority can be transferred in 134us at most. 3. CAN bus adopts a non-destructive bus arbitration technique, when several nodes send data on the bus at the same time, the low priority nodes stop sending initiatively.However, the node with the highest priority will not be affected but to transmit the data. 4. Provision of complex function of "multi-system" 5. Only by frame filtering, can the CAN bus transmit data with the modes of point-to-point, point-to-multipoints and universal broadcasting, etc. 6. Short frame structure is adopted in CAN bus, with short transmission time and low probability of interference.It possesses an excellent effect of error detection. 7. Every frame information of CAN bus has the CRC check and other error detection measures, thus to ensure an extremely low data error rate.

5 LIN bus system Introduction LIN is the acronym for Local Interconnect Network. Local Interconnect (local area network) means that all the control units are placed in a limited space (e.g. roof).Therefore, it is also known as ―LAN subsystem‖. LIN- master control unit The control unit connected to CAN data bus executes main functions of LIN. Features 1. It monitors data transmission and transmission rate, and sends message titles. 2. A cycle is set in the software of the control unit, which is used for determining when and how many times messages are sent to the LIN data bus. 3. The control unit will act as an ―interpreter‖ between the CAN bus and the LIN control unit of LIN data bus system, and it is the only control unit that connects with CAN data bus in LIN bus system. 4. In the LIN data bus system, a single control unit or sensor or actuator can be regarded as a LIN slave control unit. 5. A piece of electronic device is integrated in the sensor, which can analyze the measurement values. The value is transferred through the LIN bus as a data signal. 6. Some sensors or actuators only use one pin on the outlet of LIN main control unit. 7. LIN actuator elements are all intelligent electronic or electromechanical components, and all these components will receive tasks through LIN data signal of the LIN main control unit. The LIN main control unit obtains the actual state of executive components through integrated sensors, and makes comparison between specified state and actual state. Tips Sensors and actuators will not respond until the LIN main control unit sends out the title. Transmission of data The rate of data transmission is 1-20Kbit/s, which is set by the software of LIN control unit.

Repair Group 74 - Network Communication System

393

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

6 K-Line The K-line is used for diagnostic communication between the exterior test unit and the on-board ECU.Initialization can also be established before communication through the K-line. With single-wire communication, K-line adopts half-duplex serial communication. Features 1. Support large current 2. Seamless connection with control unit CMOS level. 3. Protective effect on the ground wire. 4. The communication of the two parties can be transmitted in a unit of "rows" by turns. 5. Every unit of the serial communication code includes 10-bit binary data, namely, start bit, 8-bit data and stop bit. Idle waiting is set after the transmitting of every unit. 6. The information line is composed of the following data: the first data indicates how much data the line still needs to send; the second data indicates the key code and how to operate this time; the third data indicates the data to be transmitted. 7 .The information line includes the inverse code used for verification, after the data is transmitted by one party, the other part will verify the inverse code responded to this data.As the K-line is single-wire communication, only when the inverse code which responded to this data is verified properly, can the communication be conducted smoothly. Transmission of data Bit rate of K-line can reach 50kbit/s at most.

394

Repair Group 74 - Network Communication System

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

75 Attachment Device 1 Reminder 1.1 Brief introduction Besides warning lights, the information center also provides plenty of alarm information with alarm sounds. The driver can be promptly informed about various faults during driving, thus ensuring traffic safety. The instrument is equipped with the following audible alarms: Parking distance alarm: refer to Parking Help; Small light ON alarm: when the key is removed, if the small light is still on and driver door open, the alarm will sound; Key in ignition reminder: when the key is not removed, but the driver door is open; Seat belt reminder alarm: when the seat belt is not fastened and the speed is more than 20km/h; Low oil pressure alarm: when the oil pressure is insufficient but the engine is started, the alarm will sound as a reminder; Steering alarm: voice prompts along with the flashing of the steering light.

1.2 Driver side seat belt switch Tips As the driver side seat belt switch is integrated in the seat belt buckle assembly, it cannot be removed separately. If necessary, only replace the seat belt buckle assembly. Removal

Remove driver side seat belt buckle assembly => Refer to page 277. Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

1.3 Front passenger side seat belt switch Tips As the front passenger side seat belt switch is integrated in the seat belt buckle assembly, it cannot be removed separately. If necessary, only replace the seat belt buckle assembly. Removal

Remove driver side seat belt buckle assembly => Electrical equipment; Repair Group: 72: Protection system; Seat belt; Removal and installation of the front seat belt buckle assembly. Installation

Repair Group 75 - Attachment Device

395

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

1.4 Ignition switch Remove the ignition => Refer to page 196.

2 Cigarette lighter 2.1 Brief introduction The cigarette lighter is located in most front of the auxiliary instrument panel, and can be used as a 12V on-board power outlet. The ignition must be ON, when the cigarette lighter power outlet is used. Note The voltage of cigarette lighter power outlet is rated at 12V DC.Any electrical equipment with a voltage higher than the rated one should not be used.

2.2 Cigarette lighter seat Removal 1. Turn off the ignition and all the electrical equipment, and remove the ignition key.

2. Disconnect the battery negative cable=>Electrical Equipment: Repair Group: 60; Power Distribution; Battery: Battery Cables: Disconnection and Connection of Battery Negative Cable. 3. Remove gearshift cover plate => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group 84; Interior equipment; Auxiliary instrument panel: Removal and installation of the auxiliary instrument panel underframe assembly. 4. Push out cigarette lighter seat along the direction of -Arrow B-. 5. Press the fixing clip -Arrow A- and take out the guide ring.

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

396

Repair Group 75 - Attachment Device

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

3. USB cable USB cable is a exterior bus standard, which is used for standardizing the connection and communication between the on board audio system and the exterior device. USB interface supports plug-and-play and hot-plug functions.

4. Multimedia interface cable Multimedia interface cable applies exterior bus standard, which is used for standardizing connection and communication between the on-board audio system and the multimedia interface equipment. The multimedia interface supports the functions of plug-and-play and hot-plug.

Repair Group 75 - Attachment Device

397

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5. Horn System 5.1 Brief introduction Two-tone speaker system is equipped with two electromagnetic speakers. Speaker system includes the following major components: 

Speaker: two speakers on the front bumper anti-collision beam.



Speaker switch: under the trim cover of the steering wheel.

5.2 Check and Diagnosis 5.2.1 Speaker not sounding No.

Inspection steps

0

Preliminary Inspection Check whether the speaker fuse is blown

1

Inspect the horn relay Check whether the speaker relay is damaged

2

Check the speaker connector Check whether the speaker connector is corrosive

3

Inspect the horn switch Check whether the speaker switch contact is ablate

4

Check the horn Check whether the speaker is damaged

5

Check the operation

Check results Normal

There's a fault

Proceed to Step 3.

Speaker fuse blown

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 2.

Speaker relay damaged

Replace the horn relay

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Speaker connector

Repair or replace the

corrosive

speaker connector

There's a fault

Operation methods

Speaker switch contact

Replace the speaker

ablated

switch

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

Proceed to Step 5.

Speaker damaged

Replace the horn

Normal

There's a fault

Operation methods

End of diagnosis

Faults still exist

Proceed to Step 1. Normal Proceed to Step 4.

After finishing the correct overhaul, check whether the fault is still there.

398

Repair Group 75 - Attachment Device

Operation methods Replace the speaker fuse

Find the cause from other symptoms

X25 2015 Electrical Equipment

5.3 Removal and installation of speaker Removal Tips The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left speaker, but may serve as a reference for the right side.

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable=>Electrical Equipment: Repair Group: 60; Power Distribution; Battery: Battery Cables: Disconnection and Connection of Battery Negative Cable. 2. Remove the engine lower baffle=>Vehicle Body and Painting; Repair Group:83; Exterior equipment; Removal and installation of engine lower baffle. 3. Press the unlocking device of horn connecting plug -Arrow A- and disengage the connector. 4. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow B- and remove the horn -1- from the bumper beam. Bolt -Arrow- specification: M8×1.25×25 Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 21 - 25 Nm Bolt -Arrow- tool: 13mm hexagon sleeve

Installation Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

5.4 Horn switch The horn switch is located under the steering wheel trim cover, but cannot be repaired separately.

Repair Group 75 - Attachment Device

399